Home

Samsung S4 User's Manual

1. 0 00 eee 40 Home Screen 0 00 000s 40 Applications 00000 sees 43 Screen Navigation 44 Using Motions and Gestures 45 Using the Multi Window 48 Menu Navigation 000005 53 Customizing the Screens 55 Section 3 Call Functions and Contacts LIST ssisccisssicccicesscseicesscecievercsecceetieed 62 Displaying Your Phone Number 62 Making aCall 000005 62 Ending a Call 22 0005 63 Making Emergency Calls 64 Dialing Options 2 65 Answering a Call 65 Managing Reject Calls 66 International Calls 67 Pause Dialing 2 22 0005 68 Wait Dialing 0000 00 ee 68 Redialing the Last Number 69 Speed Dialing 0 5 20 cece eee eee 69 Wi Fi Calling 0 000 cee eeee 71 In Call Options 00 74 WSIS VOICE cxins cece card cudtedeedehe eae 80 LOGS TAD y oionn innie leds teaa eE 81 Section 4 Entering Text cccssseeees 85 Text Input Methods 005 85 Selecting the Text Input Method 85 Entering Text Using Swype 86 Using the Samsung Keyboard 90 Using the Google Voice Typing 93 Section 5 Contact cssssssssesssees 95 ACCOUNIS 2 is2 4 2
2. 237 T Mobile TV eiiean ear e 237 TAK eee prarain oer ces E anaes 237 TripAdvisor 00000 eee eee 237 VideO agerer aos ces ee aed AHA ae Eein ET 238 Visual Voicemail 00000 0 238 Voice Recorder 00 cece cena 238 Voice Search ccc cece eee eee 239 VPN Client 00 006 cc cence ne ees 240 WAICHON asarna a6 ade nd arate eos ee 240 YOUTUBE erresa soft ath web erated sided E iekea 240 Section 9 CONNECTIONS 242 MEMET crergu vse tee eee owl ae 242 Bluetooth darras xe dane todo egeeee ed 250 Enable Downloading for Web Applications 254 PC Connections 0 eens 255 WIFI hots octet ded oie des eis Od heb iad te RES 256 USB Tethering 2 020 259 Mobile HotSpot 005 260 Section 10 Changing Your Settings 263 Accessing the Settings Tabs 263 Settings Tabs Overview 263 Wi Fi Settings 000 264 Bluetooth settings 269 Data Usage 00 eee eee 271 More Networks 00000005 272 Lock Screen 2 ee eee eee eee 281 Display Settings 0005 286 LED INGICALOF mis hahcsavads anans 288 Sound Settings 222 289 Home Screen Mode 292 Call SCHINGS ies cca aain 292 Blocking Mode 000005 301 Power Saving Mode 301 ACCESSO 0 cece ees 302 Accessibility Set
3. level topics for Contacts umbers or send contact inform ized nfigure where you save new contacts ation ide Only contacts with phones List by Display contacts by Service numbers and Contact sharing settings igh Contact Menu Options 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display e Edit allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry e Delete allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry e Join contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for e Share contact via message allows you to send the current entry info via text message e Add to favorites allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the list within the Favorites tab e Remove from favorites allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab e Add to group allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing group e Add to reject list Remove from reject list allows you to add or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected incoming phone numbers Note If an entry does not have a phone number the reject list option will not appear e Share namecard via allows you to send the curren
4. 3 Review the Terms of Service and tap Agree to continue 4 Navigate through the following on screen tutorial screens by reading the information and tapping Next or tap Skip to continue without reading the information 5 Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy Note The wake up command phrase can be changed from Hi Galaxy to anything else 80 6 Tap Speak if the device does not hear you or to give it a command Example 1 e want to find the best pizza online e Tap and say Find me the best Pizza This launches an Internet search Example 2 want to go to Cambridge e Tap and say Navigate to Cambridge This launches the Map application and indicates where these are in relation to your Current position Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as q Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call was missed Accessing the Logs Tab 1 From the Home screen tap R gt Logs tab 2 Tap an entry to view available options Note The Logs tab only records calls that oc
5. Changing Music Settings 1 182 From within the Play Music application press 1 and then make a selection E e Shuffle all Play all songs in a random order e Choose on device music In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library you can play music stored on your device s internal storage Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection To do this make some of your online music available offline For more information refer to Making Online Music Available Offline on page 186 e Settings Provides access to the Play Music settings e Help Displays application help information Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your device s built in speakers through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on screen volume control then touch and drag on the scale to set volume Playing Music 1 Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the From within the Play Music application tap a song in your library to listen to it or While viewing a list of songs tap P Options next to a song and tap Play sors While viewing a list of albums artists playlists or genres tap P Options adjacent to the label and tap Play The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks
6. sceeee 149 Assigning the Default Storage Location 149 Using the Camera 000005 150 Camera Options 0005 151 Quick Settings 0005 153 Camera and Camcorder Settings 154 Using the Camcorder 158 Sharing Pictures 160 Editing a Photo 005 167 The Gallery cense ris is sarins esner eee 169 Using Video 000 000 c eee 169 Samsung Hub 22 05 172 Using WatchON 0005 176 Play Movies amp TV 0 eee ee eee 180 Play MUSIC Gs anana aA 180 MUSIC sss den nee Dealer wetted ceed ak 187 Using Playlists 00000000e 190 Creating a Playlist 0 190 Transferring Music Files 191 Removing Music Files 191 Samsung Link 2 20 191 AllShare Cast Hub 196 T Mobile TV icc ccaawietsie vie be eed 198 VOUTUDG3 2 ci8 o 2tnenS ie Bac ceded cdedaces 198 Section 8 Applications and DevelOpMentt iiinn 199 Applications 0005 199 Calculator sanantonio EEE 199 Calendar o ctr nib eedalwies edad 200 Camera srera a ians E 202 CHAON ra medierna ar Berea snes 202 CNTOM O insa are u AEE EEEE 203 GIOGK E E Gh EEE 203 GOMTACES ici Sst ise ach bed See inland Badd ec dae 207 Downloads 222ee cece eee 207 DIOPDOX sitesi bbb dbase ce sion Gon at cota 207 EMail Acca g
7. 4 Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations Applications and Development 215 To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions e inside a building or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather e around high voltage or electromagnetic fields e in a vehicle with tinted windows Opening Maps i 216 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt F Maps Tap the upper right My location button to find your location on the map with a blinking blue dot Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access additional options e Search allows you to search for a place of interest e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point e Local provides access to the places menu where you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about a business see coupons public responses and more Local Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions or select from available categories such as Entertainment ATMs Gas stations Hotels Post office or Taxi e Layers allows you to switch map views Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real ti
8. 9 From the Registration screen Transfer click Transfer Video now and select the location of the microSD card or USB the device as the target destination for the registration video created in step 6 and click Start or Locate the created file copy and paste it into the new drive letter corresponding to your device s storage location 10 From the Home screen tap HA Apps gt E My Files 11 Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play it Once you play the registration file on your device your registration is complete 12 Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen from within your computer s DivX Player and confirm both your computer and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices 172 Important There is no special registration or configuration necessary to playback DRM free DivX movies Registration of your device is only required for playback of protected DivX material Samsung Hub Samsung Hub makes it easy to find sample and purchase movies TV shows books games and music in one user friendly location With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go has never been easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile entertainment You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and rent content via Samsung Hub Note Samsung Hub usage is based on service availabi
9. Opening the Gallery m From the Home screen tap EEE Apps gt KK Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 164 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery displays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card Viewing a Video within the Gallery 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt SK Gallery 2 Locate your folder and video 3 Tap C gt Play to playback your video For more information on using the Picture in Picture feature for video playback see Using Picture In Picture on page 170 Using Video The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card This device is able to playback DivX videos 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt gt Video A list of available videos displays in the Video list 2 Tap a video file to begin viewing Sharing Videos 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Video After a few seconds each on screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first five seconds of the clip 2 Press r and then tap Share via Multimedia 169 3 Select either individual videos or tap Select all 4 Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit 5 Select a sharing option Choose from Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Gmail Google Messaging Picassa Wi Fi Direct or YouTube Using Picture In Picture This feature
10. e Create folder allows you to create on screen folders to help organize files of application shortcuts Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens Choose from Gallery Live wallpapers or Wallpapers Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home screen and six Extended screens Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term online e Settings provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing C and then tapping EA gt Settings Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the three panels on the Applications screens Important Once you log into your Google account All previously downloaded apps should now be populated within the Application screens Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen the following menu options are available 1 Press and then tap ae Apps 2 Press l r 1 and then select from the following options e Play Store provides quick access to the Play Store page 225 e Edit allows you to organize your current applications by moving them around the screen edit or delete existing Apps folders e Create folder allows you to create an application folder wh
11. or Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection 4 Tap Done The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SD card 3 Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your device 1 From the Home screen press r and then tap Settings gt Accounts tab and then navigate to the My accounts area 2 Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap Ke within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 To synchronize only Contacts toggle the active state of the Sync Contacts field A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Contacts 109 1 From the Home screen tap ks
12. 12 Tap Next Getting Started 17 13 Accept the current device name Tap the Device name field and use the on screen keyboard to rename your device Important The device name is also used to provide an identification for your device s Bluetooth and Wi Fi Direct names 14 Tap Finish to complete the setup process 15 Read the on screen Collect diagnostics information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 16 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen 18 Important Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Accounts tab gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow diagnostics to be collected feature For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 323 Switching the Device On or Off Once the device has been configured you will not be prompted with setup screens again To turn the device on m Press and hold o Power End until the device switches on E The device searches for your network and after finding it you can make or receive calls Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language and Inpu
13. 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture can be activated 4 Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review on screen information about the Air gestures sensor and related icon 5 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures e Quick glance Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor located above the on screen clock at the upper right to temporarily activate preview window that can be used to display selected user enabled information such as Time amp Date Notification icons Missed calls etc 312 e Air jump Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor up or down and easily jump to either the top or bottom of a lengthy display page ex Internet or Email Air browse Once enabled you can move your hand over the air gesture sensor left or right and easily move to either the previous or next item in a series ex music tracks pictures or pages Air move Once enabled you can move use one finger to hold down on an app shortcut or event entry and then swipe across the air gestures sensor to then move it to a new a different page e Air call accept Once enabled you can simply wave your hand over the air gesture sensor to accept any incoming call To activate Motion 1 From the main Setting
14. 6 If you agree to the terms place a green check mark in the I accept all the terms above field and tap Agree 7 Enter your the required information and tap Sign up Note You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email 8 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to verify your account via the provided email address Note Without confirming your email address and following the documented procedures related applications will not function properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their username and password access 22 Voice Mail Setting Up Your Voice Mail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network 1 From the Home screen tap and then touch and hold the 4 a key until the device dials voicemail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name Accessing Your Voice Mail You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding 1 onthe keypad or by using the phone s Application icon then tapping the Voice Mail application To acce
15. Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 296 Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged and the Display battery percentage option is enabled within the Settings gt My device tab gt Display menu Displays your battery is currently charging Understanding Your Device 33 HH Gm 28E oo ES Displays your current battery charge level is low Charge 28 15 Displays your current battery charge level is very low Charge 15 5 Shows your current battery only has up to 4 power remaining and will soon shutdown Charge 4 1 Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network 5 mO AOD Displays when your phone is communicating with the 4G LTE network Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Displays when there is a new text message Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when an incoming text message content has failed to be downloaded
16. Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Email message Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Gmail message Displays when the user is prompted to set up a new Dropbox account pA E Kk Displays when the user is prompted with a Lookout Security notification Displays when the T Mobile Name ID application did not recognize a recent number and would like to know whether you wish to Not add or add as a New or Existing number Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 200 Displays when an alarm is set For more information refer to Setting anAlarm on page 203 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are silenced and Silent mode is set to Vibrate For more information refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 289 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds are silenced and Silent mode is set to Mute Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active For more information refer to Blocking Mode on page 301 Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled
17. Making Emergency Calls If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call 2 Enter 9 1 1 and tap K Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features Note Selecting Location consent may drain battery power For more information refer to Power Saving Mode on page 301 3 Tap is to exit this calling mode 64 Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1 tap process Before you can resume normal calling operations you should first exit this mode 1 Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device 2 From the Home screen tap Ww 3 Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap 4 Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features Note This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode 5 At the Emergency Callback screen follow the on screen instructions Dialing Options When you enter numbers on th
18. This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your device including the Camera Camcorder Music Player Samsung Link and how to manage your photos images and sounds You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already built in storage Assigning the Default Storage Location Important Too many users can overlook this storage location until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Camera 2 Press and then tap Settings gt EJ Settings and scroll up to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Device or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press gt to return to the Home screen Multimedia 149 Using the Camera 3 Before you take a picture use the Up and Down Volume keys to zoom in or out You can magnify the picture up Taking Photos
19. account to use a new account Atthe free songs screen select either Get free songs or Skip e Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play Store e Follow the on screen download and installation instructions Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available music Music albums and artists are grouped into categories Tap an on screen album to open it and begin playback Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon Music notification icon at the top left of the Application bar Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library 1 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt GD Play Music 2 While in a selection or screen tap G near the top left of the Application bar and then scroll left or right to access the various tabs 3 Available tabs include PLAYLISTS RECENT ARTISTS ALBUMS SONGS or GENRES Note The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view depending on the view Multimedia 181 Searching for Music in Your Library 1 3 From within the Play Music application tap Search to search through your available songs Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box Tap a matching song to play it tap a matching album artist or playlist to view a list of its songs
20. e Never use Cellular Network Use only Wi Fi for calls Do not use Cellular Network even if available 7 Tap OK to save the setting 8 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks 9 Tap Wi Fi Calling slider to toggle off the feature then tap it again to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network 10 Confirm B Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Confirm S Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar 3 Use the phone Dialer Logs or Contacts list to make a call 4 Go to the dialer and make a call Make sure E Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call When Action Then Displays on the screen status bar You are connected to the T Mobile network and can make Wi Fi calls Displays on the screen status bar The Wi Fi calling feature is active and in use within an active call Doesnotdisplay You are charged normal on the screen calling rate minutes For more status bar information refer to Activating Wi Fi Calling on page 72 Displays on the There is an error in the use or screen status bar 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature While Wi Fi Calling mode is active the call button shows a Wi Fi i
21. exposure from wireless phones The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects Health and Safety Information 335 The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a p
22. gt Music 2 Tap a library category tab to select the music category Songs Playlists Albums Artists Music square or Folders 3 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback Note The 5 1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is connected through the headset jack only 4 Use any of the following Music player controls GHEREA i BAA Pause the song Start the song after pausing Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to previous song Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song Volume control Volume control showing volume muted Plays the entire song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song Shuffles the current list of songs randomly Songs play in order and are not shuffled Lists the current playlist songs Displays the current song in the player window Assign the current song as a Favorite Multimedia 187 Streams the current music file to another device via Samsung Link Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1 2 Note Additional Set as options include Caller ringtone and From within the Music application tap the Songs tab Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on screen context menu Tap Set as gt Phone ringtone Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing from Select either From the beginning or Auto recommendations you can allow the application to
23. security protection for safe data communication Mobile devices such as handsets and tablets that are certified for Passpoint can still be used in existing hotspots Users on passpoint enabled hotspots will also enjoy Wi Fi roaming 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced 3 Ina single motion touch and slide the Passpoint slider to the right to turn it on 4 Tap the Passpoint field and begin the on screen process of connecting to a compatible AP Changing Your Settings 265 Wi Fi During Sleep By default when your device enter a sleep mode your Wi Fi connection stays on all the time If the feature is Never enabled during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and its network connection 1 266 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press 1 and then tap Advanced gt Keep Wi Fi on during sleep Select an available option Always maintains your current active Wi Fi connection even during sleep e Only when plugged in maintains the active Wi Fi connection only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply This reduced the drain on your device s battery e Never increase data usage shuts off the current Wi Fi connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network connection Check for Internet Service Allows you to check for Wi Fi Internet access once connected to a WAP
24. to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by Divx LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu tap Apps gt Settings gt More tab gt About device gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register Go to_vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise intermittent sounds like a siren or nearby conversation and echoes allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere How Does It Work Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system the technology e Captures evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone and the person you re speaking with e Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise so the person you re calling hears only your voice withou
25. 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Google Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Add account to create another account 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google 5 Visit www google com mobile for more information Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your device 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2 From the Home screen tap EEE Apps gt j Messenger From the Google application select Messenger 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google Tap Add account to create another account Messages 147 10 148 When prompted configure the Sync contacts parameter Sync contacts or Don t sync and tap Continue When prompted configure the Instant Upload parameters as desired and tap DONE Follow any on screen setup instructions At the Messenger screen tap to start a new message In the upper text field enter a name email address or circle In the bottom message field enter a message then tap gt Send From the Messenger screen tap Learn more for more detailed information Section 7 Multimedia
26. EA Tap an existing group and press and then tap Send message or Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message Select the recipients of the new message indicated by a green check mark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually Tap Done Type your message and tap RA Send Contacts 115 The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Logs Tab on page 81 1 From the Home screen tap Ey 2 Tap Rel Favorites tab Favorites Adding a contact to your favorites list 1 From within the Favorites tab press A and select Add to favorites B 2 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries you wish to assign as favorites 3 Tap Done to complete the process 116 Section 6 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types e Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages e Email and Gmail Messages e Google Talk Messenger e ChatON The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s messag
27. Featured Top Selling and New Arrivals 6 Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe 7 Follow the on screen instructions to subscribe to a magazine 224 Play Movies amp TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Note You must logged into your Google account prior to using this feature Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt E Play Movies amp TV A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list For more information refer to Play Movies amp TV on page 180 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m From the Home screen tap Eg Apps gt Gp Play Music For more information refer to Play Music on page 180 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account Accessing the Play Store 1 From the Home screen tap S Play St
28. In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll through the list You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list Touch the contact entry Tabs Search Create Contacts Contacts field M Tabbed Contacts peel Navigation Contacts 99 Editing Contact Information 1 2 From the Home screen tap Tap a contact name from the list and tap K Edit or Select a contact name and press and then tap Edit Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main Contacts list and then tap Edit Share contact via message Co ntext Menu Add to favorites Add to group Add to reject list Share namecard via Print contact info Add shortcut to home 3 Edit the contact information then Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Number to an Existing Contact From the Home screen tap ks F 1 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number Tap al on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enter an additional phone number Grente t Contact Details Scree e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Groups Ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to in
29. Installing the microSD Memory Card Your device supports an optional external microSD memory cards for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and other devices Note microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB microSDXC memory card types can include capacities greater than 32GB Note This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB The device comes in a 16GB model 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device 3 Orient the card with the gold strips facing down 4 Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it clicks into place Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phone s contact pins Removing the microSD Memory Card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Firmly press the card into the slot and release it The card should pop partially out of the slot 3 Remove the card from the slot 4 Replace the battery cover Getting Started 11 Battery Before using your device for the first time install the battery and charge it fully Important Before removing or replacing the battery make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the gt key until the power off image displays then tap Power off Installing the Battery 1
30. Press 11 and then tap Contacts to display Select any of the following to filter according to the selection e All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact e Device lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone information e SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your list has not been updated repeat step 2 3 N e Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and sync d within the Samsung account e Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account e Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which contacts to display You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers e Customized list allows you to enable which account OO categories are displayed For example on Google contacts you Note Once a display filter has been selected only those can filter which Contact categories are shown Friends Family Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is etc re selected 110 Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchro
31. Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature for example you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the device Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example touch an Application icon to open the application A light touch works best Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options 44 Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and fo
32. Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as ie 400 percer simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then pressing the camera key Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to B zoom in Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions shadows may appear on the photo 4 If desired before taking the photo you can tap on screen icons to access various camera options and 1 From the Home screen tap BE Apps gt settings Camera Using the device s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject Note On your initial activation of the camera firmware configuration can take up to 1 minute This is a one time process 150 You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest Tap la Camera until the shutter sounds The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location page 149 If no microSD is installed all pictures are stored on the Phone For more information refer to Camera Options on page 151 Note Touch and hold a to take a burst shot These are saved using a Fine image quality Self portrait Camera mode Battery Quick Settings Charge Dual Camera Storage Take Picture Image viewer Effects Mode Change Viewfinder Pecord video Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen 1 From the camera viewfinder
33. Text Picture Video Messaging and Google Talk Corporate and Personal Email Music Player with multitasking features Pre loaded e reader applications such as Play Books and Play Magazines Assisted GPS Google Navigation Webkit based browser Expandable memory slot supports up to 64GB microSD Mobile HotSpot and USB Tethering capability T Mobile TV e Video Chat via Google Talk e Google Play Music o Wi Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card HD Video Player 1080p Codec MPEG4 H 264 H 263 VC 1 WMV7 8 VP8 MP43 Format 3GP MP4 WMV ASF AVI and DivX 28 e Video Player support for PIP Picture in Picture viewing DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium content Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your device The following list correlates to the illustrations 1 Indicator light illuminates with a series of distinct colors and flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and statuses Events include Charging Low battery and Missed event Powering on blue blinks animates e Battery Charging red remains on e Battery Fully Charged green remains on e Low Battery or Charging Error red blinks animates e Missed Notification Call or Messaging blue blinks animates For more information refer to LED Indicator on page 288 2 Light RGB Sensor lets you use the ambient light level
34. The light will turn on by default unless you turn them off 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt LED indicator 2 Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off e Charging LED lights up when the device is connected to the charger Low battery LED lights up when the battery level is low e Notifications LED lights up when you have missed calls messages or application events e Voice recording LED lights up when you are recording voice The LED only lights up when the screen is off Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Sound The following options display Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 From the Home screen press and hold Power End until the Device options screen displays 2 Tap either Mute Vibrate or Sound from the Device options screen to activate or deactivate these features the current mode displays Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup m
35. Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and videos from a specific country or region Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube information to help improve the application e Channel Feed Content Sets the content that you want to appear within your channel feed All activity is the default option Search Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube searches from showing up in the YouTube search box Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never store search history information SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for videos containing restricted content This option blocks these videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t filter Moderate or Strict e Preloading Preload subscriptions allows you to preload or go get videos while on Wi Fi and charging your subscription videos Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function on selected videos so you can watch them later Read the data usage information and tap OK to accept the terms Note Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device s storage space and may result in additional charges if your Wi Fi plan is not unlimited e About Help provides answers to most YouTube questions Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube Google Mobile Term
36. can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat Share things such as pictures videos animation messages Scribbles audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location information Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link ChatON and Media Hub For more information visit https web samsungchaton com Registering with the Service 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt ChatON Tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account or Tap Skip to continue without logging in Read the on screen notification about data charges and tap OK Select a country code enter your current phone number to register with the service and tap Done Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy and read the on screen information Tap Accept to continue Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS text message or Voice answering machine call to your device Messages 145 Note If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS this 8 information is sent directly to your device Once received the Verification field is automatically filled in Enter your real name and tap 0K Adding Your First Chat On Buddy 1 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Chaton Tap amp Add buddy and choose a search method e Phone number B to
37. gt TV T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Note T Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any Wi Fi connections must be disabled 3 Tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection 198 4 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service or Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or Purchase Options to buy the paid features 5 Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Home Live TV TV Shows Favorites Help Search More Info Browse or Live Channels YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos 3 Press gt Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile if you prefer high quality output Section 8 Applications and Development This section contains a description of each application that is available in the Applications Menu its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the application is already described in a
38. humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing device and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in tel
39. reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out o
40. specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the following FCC website http www fcc gov oet ea The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung s website http Awww samsung com sar SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http www fcc gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones Health and Safety Information 341 FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipmen
41. tap Sign in or Tap Skip to continue with the setup process and create an account later For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 6 Atthe Got Google screen choose either Yes to log into your existing Google account or No to continue e If you selected Yes on the Sign in screen enter your current Google Email and Password information and tap D Next e Tap OK to agree to the Google legal agreements e If prompted to enable purchases tap Set up credit card and enter your credit card information and click Save e Click Skip to continue without entering this information 7 If you indicated that you did not have a current Google account then at the Make it Google screen choose either Get an account to create a new account or Not now to continue 8 Select deselect the desired Google amp location services and tap OG Next Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power 9 When prompted enter a First and Last name then tap O Next This will help to identify this as your device 10 When prompted with the Dropbox activation screen you can choose to either Create account Sign in Disclaimer or tap Skip to continue Note For more information refer to Dropbox on page 207 11 From the Learn about key features screen e Tap an available field to display an on screen tutorial e Tum on a feature by sliding the activation slider to the ON position A
42. 2 Open a message to reveal the message string 3 Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete message 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message bubbles 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Open a message to reveal the message string 3 Press and then tap Delete messages 4 Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for deletion or choose Select all 5 Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit Messages 125 Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Press 1 and then tap Search 3 Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap Q 4 All messages that contain the entered search string display Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 Press m and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available General settings e Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation 126 e Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation Text message SMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you w
43. 3 When you are prompted to download the Facebook application from the Play Store e Tap Install gt Accept amp download to complete the process e Tap Open to launch the application 4 Log into your Facebook account e Enter your account s access Email and Password information and tap Log in 5 If prompted configure any requested optional permissions and tap Log in Contacts 111 6 If prompted select a Contacts Sync option Choose from Sync all Sync with existing contacts or Don t sync 7 Tap Done to complete the login and sync process To resync Social Network Contacts 1 From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings gt Accounts tab and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap Facebook and toggle the checkmark alongside the desired fields 3 Choose the parameters to sync ex Sync Calendar Sync Contacts or Sync Gallery and tap Sync now Note From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to resync all accounts 112 Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press m and then tap Send message email gt Send email Contacts that contain an email address display 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of
44. 54 Using Context Menus Context menus also called pop up menus contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen They function similarly to menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer m Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu fy Check Balance Check Minutes Join contact Share contact via message Context Add t0 favorites Menu Add to group Add to reject list Share namecard via Print contact info Add shoricut to home Accessing Recently Used Applications 1 Press and hold to open the recently used applications window Note This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager 2 A pop up displays the six most recently used applications 3 Tap an icon to open the recent application Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail You can customize your Home screen by doing the following e Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens e Assigning a New Home screen Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts e Sharing Application Information Managing Shortcuts e Adding and Removing Widgets e Changing the Background Wallpapers Understanding Your Device 55 A
45. 8 8 ae pae de Oe hana eee S 95 2 Contacts LISt iiaae ee eee 95 Finding a Contact 99 Contact List Options 102 Contact Menu Options 103 Contact Entry Options 104 Joining Contact Information 104 Sending aNamecard 107 Copying Contact Information 108 Synchronizing Contacts 109 Display Options 110 Adding more Contacts via Accounts AMO SYNC roemenie eiiiai ea s 111 Additional Contact Options 112 GROUPS a csp irdeded Dear ea enia 114 The Favorites Tab 0002 116 Section 6 Messages ss sssseseseeesees 117 Types of Messages 117 Creating and Sending Messages 118 Message Options 119 Viewing Newly Received Messages 123 Deleting Messages 125 Message Search 022 00000 126 Messaging Settings 00 126 Assigning Messages as Spam 129 Accessing Your Spam Folder 131 Text Templates 200000025 131 Using Email sosaren stear neartan nai 131 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook 137 Using Google Mail 05 142 Google Talk 2 4 600 ests 144 CHALONE dicts dctuedincdivne Suwa a inate ae He 145 C100 ee 147 Messenger 00000 cece eee 147 Section 7 Multimedia
46. Always or Just once 8 Tap B Save to store a draft of the current email on your device so that you can come back later and continue the email 9 Tap Delete to discard the current email 10 Once complete tap Send Configuring Email Settings 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap ER gt OW Email Select an account Press and then tap Settings gt lt Account gt Alter any of the following settings e Email notifications Activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email Gmail etc is received e Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received e Vibrate Activates a vibration when a new email message is received Sync Email enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server e Sync schedule allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off Peak times e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails Inasingle motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right to tum it on Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap OK to save the new signature e Default account Assign thi
47. Applications and Development 205 Setting a Timer 1 From within the Clock application tap Timer tab 2 Tap the Hours Minutes or Seconds field and use the on screen keypad to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked m From within the Clock application tap Desk clock tab The default Desk clock is displayed Note You might have to scroll across the tabs to locate the Desk clock tab at the far right 206 To make changes press r and then tap Settings The following options are displayed while in full screen mode e Calendar when this is checked the calendar is displayed Tap to uncheck e Weather when this is activated the location temperature and weather condition is displayed Touch and slide the slider to the right to tum it on e Dock allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock sound Audio output mode Desk home screen display Automatic unlock and Audio output For more information refer to Accessory on page 302 7 Tap to display the Desk clock in full screen mode 8 To make changes in full screen mode press and then tap e Edit shortcuts allow
48. Battery Life Extending 15 Battery Usage 330 Battery Use amp Safety 344 Bigger Font Setting 303 Blacklist Adding 103 Blocking Mode 301 On 301 Bluetooth 269 About 250 Change Name 251 Changing Name 270 Configure Device Settings 253 Deleting a Paired Device 253 Device Name 18 Disconnecting a Paired Device 253 Media Audio 253 Microhone Function 253 373 Off 250 270 On 250 269 Outgoing Headset Condition 293 296 Paring Devices 252 Review Downloaded Files 251 Scan for Devices 251 Scanning for other Devices 270 Sending Contact Information 254 Sending Contacts Via 254 Sending Namecard 108 Set Visibility 251 Settings 250 Status indicators 250 Switching to Headset during call 76 Turning on and off 250 269 Visibility 270 Visible Time Out 251 Bookmarks Backing Up 322 Browser Adding bookmarks 246 Deleting bookmarks 247 374 Emptying cookies 247 Entering a URL 244 Navigation 242 Options 242 Resetting Default Actions 330 Settings 248 Bubble Options 124 Burst Shots 151 Cc Calculator Scientific Functions 199 Calendar Creating an event 201 Settings 201 Sync 200 Calibrate Screen 47 314 Call Accessories 293 Settings 65 66 292 Call Alert Call Vibrations 293 295 Call Alerts 293 Call Answering Ending 293 Call Barring 296 297 Call Duration 84 Resetting Times 84 Call Forwarding 293 Configuring 297 Call Functions 62 Answering 65 Answering w Gestures 66 Background Calli
49. Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth Settings menu _ 1 From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by RON 3 Press I and tap the Visibility timeout Received files and Help fields to set the options To change your Bluetooth name 1 Verify Bluetooth is active i 2 From the Home screen press 11 and then tap Settings gt More tab gt About device 3 Tap the Device name field and use the on screen keyboard to edit the current device name 4 Tap al to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 5 Tap OK to confirm your setting To set visibility 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never timeout Press I Menu gt Visibility timeout This value appears as a countdown within this Visibility timeout field To scan for Bluetooth devices 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers To review your Bluetooth
50. Device 39 Function Keys Your device comes equipped with three main function keys that can be used on any screen Home Menu and Back Home Key The Home key c takes you back to your Home screen indicated by a white Home icon m Press and hold to launch the Recent apps Task manager screen For more information refer to Accessing Recently Used Applications on page 55 Menu Key The Menu key activates an available menu function for the current screen or application Back Key The Back key returns you to the previously active screen If the on screen keyboard is currently open this key Closes the keyboard 40 Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your phone There are initially seven available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Signal strength Battery status Connection Status Time Notification Widget area Status arga Google Search Home Screen Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts e Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection Emails and Text MMS messages These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by swiping down from t
51. Games Volume 289 Gesture Settings 311 Gestures Overview 45 Getting Started 7 Battery 12 Battery Cover 8 Locking Unlocking the Device 19 microSD card 11 SIM Card 9 Switching Device On Off 18 Voice Mail 22 Gmail 142 210 Composing a Message 143 Creating an Additional Account 144 Opening 142 Other Options 143 Personalize 307 Personalize Swype 309 Refreshing 143 Signing In 142 Viewing 143 Google Backing Up Settings 322 Create New Account 19 Retrieving Password 20 Signing into Your Account 20 Voice Typing 85 Google Books 223 Google Mail see also Gmail 143 Google Maps Enabling a location source 215 Opening a map 216 Google Music 180 225 Google Now 26 239 Adjust Settings 26 Google Places See also Local 214 Google Talk 237 Google Voice Typing Configuring 305 Using 94 GPS amp AGPS 348 Group Joining 212 Group Play 211 Creating a Group 212 Dropbox 209 Joining a Group 212 S Memo 230 Share Music 188 Share Pictures 156 Sharing Pictures 212 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 114 Creating a new caller group 114 Deleting 115 Deleting a Caller Group 115 Editing a Caller Group 115 Removing an Entry 115 Settings 115 Gyroscope Calibration 47 314 H Handwriting 91 Settings 306 Haptic Feedback Turn On Off 302 Vibrate 291 Vibration Setting 289 HDR 152 Health and Safety Information 335 Help In Device 213 Hidden Applictions Show 43 Hold Placing a Call on Hold 75 Home 40 Home Key 40 Home
52. I The following options display Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts e Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage location SIM card or SD card namecards via methods such Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Merge accounts allows you to merge all of your curren active Google or Samsung account If several of your contacts are from other external sources this allows you to back them up or copy them to t Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit to add and man atON Google LDAP or Microsoft This option also allows you to manually current contacts with their respective Contact entries with ei your Samsung accoun Accounts allows you Samsung account Ch Exchange ActiveSync synchronize all of your accounts For more in ither yo formation refer Contacts on page 109 Speed dial setting a lows you to set you can also send as Bluetooth ChatON Emai age mobile accounts on o Synchronizing p speed dialing e Send message email allows you to send a text picture message or an email using your Google account e Contacts to display allows you to choose to display Al contacts those on your Phone SIM card Samsung account Gmail or only display contacts that are part of a Custom list e Settings allows you to co to or view your service n Options inc e Help provides an on screen Help file that covers most hi
53. Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Important If you are not using a new ISIM card you will receive an Error ERxx Invalid SIM message You must be using a new ISIM card to use this feature Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 72 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the Status Bar e f prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt Done From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks Locate the Wi Fi Calling field and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on If E Missing 911 Address displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide 911 an address for emergency situations e Log into my t mobile com e Click on Profile and edit the Edit customer information e Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Wi Fi Calling Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use by the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Network Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls
54. SIM card note that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save that Contact into your phone s onboard memory 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Tap al to create a contact Note You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing E and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact Continue with step 3 3 Tap a destination type Device SIM Samsung account Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync depending on where you want to save the new contact information Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad e Tap v gt to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Image Pictures by people Take picture or S Memo Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Mobile Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom or Callback Tapa phone number field and enter a phone number e Tap al on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phon
55. SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Some features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be unlocked by using the new micro SIM card To use this new micro SIM card call or contact T Mobile customer service for more information This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem Getting Started 9 Installing and Removing the SIM card This device uses a different type of SIM card called a micro SIM slot Other larger SIM cards will not function or fit within this To install the SIM card 1 10 Carefully slide the micro SIM card into the SIM card socket until it clicks into place Correct Micro SIM card Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the phone and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown To remove the micro SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro SIM slot and push the card slightly out 3 Carefully slide the card out of the micro SIM card socket Note If the card is not inserted correctly the device will not detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the device remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation
56. Slide the battery into the compartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 12 Removing the Battery m Grip the battery at the top end 3 and lift it up and out of the battery compartment 4 Installing Battery Removing Battery Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your device Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your device for the first time you must fully charge the battery A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours ex Correct r lt Charging Head XN Incorrect Pg USB Cable Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery can cause the device to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time Connect the USB cable to the charging head Locate the Charger Accessory jack Insert the USB cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack Plug the charging head
57. USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Activate the desired connection method For more information see either USB Tethering on page 259 or Mobile HotSpot on page 260 Music This application allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists m From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt Music For more information refer to Music on page 187 My Files This application allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap ce Apps gt E My Files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subfolders etc Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location To open files 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt E My Files 2 Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file e Home tab A allows you to back up to the root directory e Up tab all
58. Up to PC 320 Memory Card Erasing Files 331 Merge Calls 77 Merge with Google 102 Message Options 119 Read 123 Register a Number as Spam 124 Reply 123 146 Thread Options 124 Threads 123 Message Search 126 Message threads 123 Messaging Adding a Signature 128 Adding Attachments 121 Additional Text 122 Block Unknown Senders 128 130 Creating and sending 118 Creating and Sending Text Messages 118 Current Message Options 120 Deleting a message 125 Draft 119 Google Mail 142 Icons on the Status Bar 117 Insert Smiley 120 Locked 119 Menu Options 119 Options 119 Scheduled Messages 119 Settings 126 Signature 128 Signing into Google Mail 142 Spam 119 Text Templates 131 Translate Text 121 Types of Messages 117 Viewing new 123 micro SIM Card 10 Changing Exisitng PIN 325 Importing and Exporting 113 Insertion 10 Lock 325 Removal 10 Setting Up Lock 325 microSD Card Insertion 11 Removal 11 Microsoft Exchange 96 131 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 84 Mobile Data Activate Deactivate 271 Set Data Limit 271 Usage 272 Mobile HotSpot 260 276 Activating 260 Allowed Devices 262 Changing Password 261 Connecting 261 MAC Filtering 262 Mobile HotSpots Detect and Connect 272 Mobile Networks 272 Data Roaming 273 Mobile Data 272 Mobile Web 242 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 244 381 Navigating with the Mobile Web 242 Using Bookmarks 245 Mono Audio Setup 304 Motion Activate 46 313 Browse Image 31
59. Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi direct communication This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or WAP A Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and f 4 configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and communicating Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi network connection To activate your connection 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct 4 Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device or Tap Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device names to begin the connection process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established Confirm appears in the Status bar 6 When prompted to complete the connection the recipient should tap OK Your status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing Bluetooth settings In this menu you can a
60. Wireless Access Point 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced Tap the Check for Internet service field to activate the feature A green check mark indicates the feature is active Finding your WI Fi Address Information 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press and then tap Advanced Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the bottom of the screen e MAC address view your device s MAC address required when connecting to some secured networks not configurable e IP address view your device s IP address Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi gt Add Wi Fi network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Wireless Access Point Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Connect to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID WPS Push Button The WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup feature sometimes associated with a physical or on screen
61. a folder location and tap Upload Note If your share folder is located on your computer you will momentarily receive an on screen popup notifying you that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox folder Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message m From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt O Email For more information refer to Using Email on page 131 Applications and Development 209 Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you Access news stories personal feeds and other related material Flip through your Facebook newsfeed tweets from your Twitter account photos from friends and much more 1 From the Home screen tap G Flipboard 2 Swipe up to get started select some on screen categories and tap Done to create a new profile or Apps gt Tap Tap to sign In to log into your previously created profile 3 Follow the on screen instructions 210 Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt EH Gallery For more information refer to The Gallery on page 169 Gmail Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail
62. access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off m From the Home screen press j 1 and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Lock screen gt Screen lock The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as e Swipe Swipe the screen to unlock it e Face unlock Look at your phone to unlock it e Face and voice Look at your phone and speak to unlock e Pattern A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and use to unlock your device Follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock pattern e PIN Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen Password Create a password for unlocking the screen e None No pattern PIN or password is required The screen will never lock Swipe options 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen 2 Configure one of the following options e Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on your lock screen Appears as an options after a lock mode is enabled e Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed on your home screens e Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on e Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the phone You can select None Ripple effect
63. access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype You can also use the following Swype text entry tips e Create a squiggle like an S shape to create a double letter such as pp in apple Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a selection Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions Double touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word then touch the delete key to erase one character Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype 1 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the key From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard With Swype as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e ABC ae to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on screen keyboard e SYM Symbol to enter numbers and symbols from the on screen keyboard changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case Swype Keyboard Overview e Recipients a field where you can enter the recipients of the current message You can choose from Groups Favorites Contacts or Logs e Text Input field a field where text number or other characters can be entered e CAPS ALT key When in 123ABC mode this key changes the Capitalization of the subsequent entered characters When in SYM mode this key ca
64. access the files and folders you area currently sharing from your computer 6 Tap an item to open it 7 Tap the bottom of the image to reveal additional options Delete to erase the current file e Share via applications such as Copy link Bluetooth ChatON Email Flipboard Gmail Google Google Messaging S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Add to Favorite to assign a favorite tag to the current image 10 11 More to choose from options such as Open with to open the current file with the default in device application Export to transfer the current file to another location via Save to SD card Bluetooth ChatON Email Flipboard Gmail Google Group Play Messaging Picasa S Memo or Wi Fi Direct Tap t Up a Directory Level at the top of the application window to navigate up a single level with every tap Tap Camera Uploads Albums at the top of the application window to access your Uploads and Albums tabs Tap Tag as Favorite at the top of the application window to assign favorite files Tap Search at the top of the application window to search for files located in your Dropbox account Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt I Camera 2 After the image is taken tap the Image Viewer box at the bottom right This previews the current image 3 Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of the screen 4 Tap gt 3 Dropbox select
65. active icon Ol appears in the Status bar 3 Place a green check mark adjacent to those features you would like to enable Choose from Disable incoming calls Disable notifications Disable alarm and timer Disable LED indicator Configure a timeframe for these features to be active Remove the check mark from the Always field to configure the From and To time fields Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are exempted from these rules Choose from None All contacts Favorites or Custom Allowed contacts will then appear in the Allowed contact list Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Power saving mode In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve power CPU power saving allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU Changing Your Settings 301 Screen power saving allows you to lower the screen power level e Turn off haptic feedback allows you to tum off vibration when you tap or touch the screen 4 Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about various ways to conserve battery power When the power gets low confirm appears at the top of the screen This
66. allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off Peak times e Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize Choose from Automatic All 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails Ina single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap Done to save the new signature e Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages e Out of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message Tap the More settings field to access additional options Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bec or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails e Forward with attachments Lets you in
67. allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings Tap audio Choose from High or Low the recordings to delete and tap Delete Channel allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono e Settings the following settings are available or Stereo Storage allows you to choose where your recordings will be Skip interval allows you to assign a skip length saved Select between Phone or memory card e End allows you to exit the application Recording quality allows you to set the recording quality to Voice Search High or Normal Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice Limit for MMS allows you to select On or Off If you Limit for to text Internet searching MMS by selecting On you will be assured that the recording can 1 From the Home screen tap Fe Apps gt be sent in a message Voice Search Contextual filename requires GPS tagging allows you to 2 When prompted speak into the built in microphone adjust the filename based on contextual information such as 3 Use the on screen options to find a matching search your current GPS location term Default name allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings For example if your Default name is Voice your recordings would be named Voice 001 Voice 002 Voice 003 etc Applications and Development 239 VPN Client This is a full featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest IPSec VPN standards and provides inte
68. amount of time 4 Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically after a selected amount of time Note TalkBack when installed and enabled speaks feedback to help blind and low vision users Important TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter Note The Lock automatically function is only available if your except passwords including personal data and device is already using the screen lock feature credit card numbers It may also log your user interface interactions with the device 5 Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information 10 Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts 6 Select Answering ending calls field to select the used on the device within menus options etc methods you can use to answer and end a call Choose from Tiny Small Normal Large or Huge 7 Tap Show shortcut allows you to press and hold 11 Enable Magnification gestures to use exaggerated o Power End to use the accessibility shortcut gestures such as triple tapping double pinching and under the Device options screen dragging two fingers across the screen 8 Tap Manage accessibility to save and update your 12 Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of accessibility settings or share them with another on screen colors from White text on a Black device You can export your settings import a background to Black text on a White background previously saved file or
69. an exchange email account and tap an email message Refreshing Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap EH 2 Select an email account e If you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Select an available email account 3 Tap Refresh Composing Exchange Email gt eo Email m For more information refer to Composing Email on page 134 Messages 139 Deleting an Exchange Email Message Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and select Delete from the on screen context menu With the email message displayed tap tw Delete Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area Tap the Microsoft Exchange account and Settings gt lt Exchange email account gt or From the Home screen tap Ea gt Email select an account and press and then tap Settings gt lt Account gt Alter any of the following settings e Email notifications Activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email is received e Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received 140 e Vibrate Activates a vibration when a new email message is received Sync Email enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server Sync schedule
70. and close any unnecessary applications Getting Started 15 e Use the Task Manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your device to slow down Turn off any streaming services after use see Running Services e Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Initial Device Configuration 1 Select a language from the associated field English is the default language Note If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing tap Accessibility to configure the accessibility settings 2 Tap Next Note You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is completed 3 At the Wi Fi screen move the slider to activate the feature and connect to either an existing Wireless Access Point WAP or tap Next to continue 16 4 If prompted assign the Date and time settings Enable the Automatic date and time field select a time zone and tap Next e If you disable the Automatic date and time feature you can then manually assign this information Note The Date and time menu may not appear if automatically detected via your internal microSIM card 5 At the Samsung account screen select one of the following options e If this is your first time tap Create new account e If you have previously created a Samsung account
71. appear on your photos when you upload them to the Intemet To avoid this deactivate e Review set this option i Volume key assigns a the GPS tag setting you want to view each picture after you take it Select a time value unction to the volume key Choose from The zoom key The camera key or The record key Multimedia 155 Timer Use this for delayed time shots You can set the timer to Off 2 sec 5 sec or 10 sec White balance Select an appropriate white balance so images have a true to life color range The settings are designed for specific lighting situations These settings are similar to the heat range for white balance exposure in professional cameras Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Guidelines Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects e Flash activate or deactivate the flash e Voice control activates deactivates voice control feature that allows you to verbally take a photo e Contextual filename allows you to have your location added as part of the filename You must first activate GPS tag described above Save as flipped when set to On this option allows you to take and save a mirror image video when using self recording mode Storage Select the memory location for storage 156 Shutter sound Turn the shutter sound on or off Reset Reset the camera settings Pictures and Vi
72. applications shown in a split screen tap the Border bar to show the on screen icons 2 Tap the desired application area top or bottom 3 Locate and tap o Maximize the app The current apps are the both maximized To close a selected application 1 With the two applications shown in a split screen tap one of the two on screen apps to select it 2 Tap the Border bar to show the on screen icons 3 Locateandtap X lt Close the app The current app is close and the remaining app is maximized Menu Navigation You can tailor the device s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your device defaults with seven screens Navigating Through the Application Menus There are three default Application Menu screens available As you add more applications from the Play Store more screens are created to house these new apps 1 From the Home screen tap oH Apps The first Application Menu screen displays e To close the Applications screen press Home 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus 3 Tap any of the on screen icons to launch the associated application Understanding Your Device 53 Using Sub Menus Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press I A sub menu displays at the bottom of the screen 2 Tap an available on screen option Sub Menu items
73. be manually moved across the screen The apps panel containing the scrollable apps can be relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen To move the tab Up or Down 1 Activate the Multi window feature page 48 2 Press and hold the Back key S to view the tab 3 Ina single motion touch and hold the tab for approximately one second then slowly drag it to its new location along the current screen edge Note This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you can t get to a button or option behind it Understanding Your Device 49 To relocate the Multi window apps panel 1 Activate the Multi window feature 2 Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps Note Its only when the tab is detached that the entire panel can be relocated 3 In a single motion touch and hold for approximately one second to detach it from the screen 1 then slowly drag it to its new location along any other available screen edge 2 SA TEO 50 Customizing the Multi Window apps The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi window can be organized by either being rearranged or removed To rearrange the Multi window applications 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps In a single motion touch and hold a desired app until it detaches from the panel then carefully drag it to a new
74. button on most WAPs allows you to pair your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode This process is similar to Wi Fi Direct pairing In this case once the WPS feature is active on your WAP your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it Note WPS capable routers appear in the Wi Fi list of available devices with the term WPS available below their name To pair your device using WPS 1 Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless Access Point From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press then tap WPS push button Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears in the Wi Fi list as connected Changing Your Settings 267 WPS PIN Entry If a WPS Push Button does not work there is an alternative WPS connection method where you would use a device generated PIN number to establish the connection This number is then entered into your WAP s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection To pair your device using WPS PIN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press I then tap WPS PIN entry 3 Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your Wi Fi Router s client PIN field 4 Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears in the Wi Fi list as connected 268 Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings You can configure your device to connect directly with other
75. calls or alarms to vibration voice control will not be available Add Account This menu allows you to set up manage and synchronize accounts including your Google and email accounts Adding an Account _ 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt Accounts tab 2 Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add account and select one of the account types 3 Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your credentials and set up the account 4 Agreen circle will appear next to the account type once you have created an account Your email account will also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu Removing an Account Important Removing an account also deletes all of its messages contacts and other data from the device From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the account name From the Accounts area of the screen tap the account entry Tap Remove account then tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages contacts and other data Synchronizing a Accounts By default all managed accounts are synchronized You can also manually sync all current accounts 1 2 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the account name Tap the account name entry Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to synchronize
76. coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Smart Practices While Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips e Use
77. damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way e Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a metallic object coin key jewelry clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung approved batteries and or chargers Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger Misuse or use of incom
78. download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Play Store applications 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Verify Apps Allows you to block or warn yourself before installing apps that can cause harm 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Verify apps to active this feature Note Enabling this feature can prevent installation of some applications from the Play Store Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials 3 Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 4 Tap Clear credentials to clear the device SD card or phone memory of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password Application Manager This device can be used for Android development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the dev
79. enable the GPS satellite Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location Enabling My Places 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Location services 2 Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations Security The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for your device Encrypt Device When enabled this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your device each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is connected 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Security 2 Tap Encrypt device For more information read the displayed help screen 3 Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD card data that requires a password be entered each time the microSD card is connected Tip Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent Encryption may take an hour or more Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protectin
80. exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices Important If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just functioning as a headphone but also have built in microphones for picking up voice Although both functions are detected by the device and activated there might be times when you need to change or update these settings for Phone and Media Audio e can hear the other person but they can t hear me e want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap o Settings 3 Toggle the Call audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s on board microphone 4 Toggle the Media audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s headset functions Note If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone but retains the knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device there
81. htm 1 888 232 6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not connect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Should read
82. incoming call res the connected Bluetooth one of two settings Even when device locked or Only when device unlocked e Wi Fi Calling Allows you to both activate deactivate the Wi Fi Calling feature and configure its settin gs For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 71 Note If the Wi Fi Calling feature is active and connected the Call forwarding feature is greyed out and inaccessible e Additional settings allows you to configure additional call settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 296 Changing Your Settings 293 294 e Ringtones and keypad tones allows you to manage your device s ringtones and vibratory features Choose from Ringtones Vibrations Vibrate when ringing and Keypad tones used when the keypad is pressed e Personalize call sound allows you to enable the personalize call sound function within an active call You can adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset For more information refer to Adjusting the Call Volume on page 74 e Noise reduction allows you to enable suppression of background audio e Increase volume in pocket enables the ringtone volume to be increased when the device is in a pocket or bag e Voicemail service allows you to assign the service e Voicemail settings displays the settings for the voicemail e Sound assigns your device s ringtone e Vibrate configures
83. indicates the power saving mode is active Accessory This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when using a car or desk dock o 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Accessory 2 Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing the phone from the dock 3 Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked 4 Tap Desk home screen display if you wish to show the desk home screen when the device is docked 302 5 Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover and you want your phone to unlock when you open the cover 6 Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or Surround Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Play Store 2 Select the Auto rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen 3 Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature after a defined
84. into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Getting Started 13 Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device E gt a Note This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for connecting the charger If the charger is incorrectly connected damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone s warranty 14 5 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect the charger s connector from the phone Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 359 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain 15 charge a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your device conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight
85. is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 3 Tap OK to confirm disconnection Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap oO Settings gt Unpair to delete the paired device Connections 253 Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Contact information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap Contacts 3 Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5
86. menu e Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers e Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options For more information refer to Browser Settings on page 248 e Help allows you view additional information concerning the Internet application Connections 243 Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website m From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap efey Search the Internet To perform an Internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap the entry from the list of search results that are displayed 3 Tap a link to view the website 244 Adding and Deleting Windows You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time To add a new window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt F gt jy New window 2 Anew browser window displays Note The number of currently open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Windows screen 3 Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window To delete an existing window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available
87. more information refer to Wi Fi on page 256 Activating Wi Fi 1 2 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt MASAA Connections tab In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on B The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your device automatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile services 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi Press E1 and then tap Advanced Configure the settings as desired The available Wi Fi connection are displayed with a security type displayed next to them Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced 3 Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active 4 Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature Passpoint Wi Fi CERTIFIED Passpoint allows users connect to Wi Fi hotspot networks by simplifying the process of connecting to the correct network In addition this connection type provides WPA2
88. of configurable settings Creating a Calendar Event 1 F oan the Home screen tap ER 31 Calendar Apps gt 2 Within the Year Month Week and Day tabs Create event to create a new Calendar event Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt OT 2 Press I gt Settings 3 Tap View styles and select an option e Tap Month view styles and select an option Tap Week view and select a type 4 Tap First day of week and select either Local default Saturday Sunday or Monday 5 Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selection 10 11 12 Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the side of the week entries Tap Calendars and select the type of general synchronization settings you want A check mark indicates selection Tap Set alerts amp notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification Tap Vibration to assign a vibrati
89. on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can also be found within the Applications screens The Application screens can be accessed by tapping EE Apps from the Primary shortcuts area Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times Understanding Your Device 41 e Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone N launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Favorites and Contacts Contacts Ey launches the Contacts related screens Phone Groups Favorites and Contacts Messaging Ne launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Internet launches the built in Web browser Apps launches the Applications page Tap Apps to access the Applications screens While in the Applications screens tap Back to easily return to the Home screen As you transition from screen to screen a screen indicator located at the bottom displays the currently active panel 42 Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen press I and then select any of the following menu options Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a selected screen
90. registering your device to play DivX protected video tap License settings gt DivX VOD e Device name allows you to both display and edit the device s name e Model number displays the device s mode number e Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this device Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on this device e Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this device e Build number displays the software build number Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative e SELinux status displays the status of SELinux SELinux is a set of security policies modules which is applied to the device to improve the overall security Software Update The Software Update feature enables you to use your device to connect to the network and upload any new software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when the Software updated feature is active Displays when the Software update feature is in progress Changing Your Settings 333 To update your device 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt About device gt Software update Read the
91. search by Country code and phone number e Search by ID Q to search by using a known samsung account ID Select a country code if it differs from yours Enter the information and tap Q Search Once the recipient is matched their entry appears in the Results area Tap Add and confirm your new buddy appears in the Buddies tab 146 Note For more information press l Settings and tap General gt Help Using ChatON for Chatting 1 4 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Chaton Tap the Buddies tab and select a buddy to initiate your chat Enter your message using the on screen text entry method Tap Send To reply to a ChatON message 1 While the chat session is active tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy s messages are white Tap Send to deliver your reply Deleting a single message bubble 1 From the Home screen tap Chaton HE Apps gt 2 Launch a chat session to reveal the message string 3 Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google
92. share your file with another device 9 Tap TalkBack to activate the feature Changing Your Settings 303 13 14 15 16 17 18 304 Select Color adjustment to allow you to adjust the display colors if you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display because of the colors Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow you to quickly enable accessibility features in 2 quick steps Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Tap the Text to speech options field to configure the text to speech configuration parameters Tap the Enhance web accessibility field to allow apps to install scripts from Google that make their Web content more accessible Use the Sound balance field to allow you to use the slider to set the Left and Right balance when using a stereo device Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud earphone 19 20 21 22 23 Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps selections notifications etc Tap Flash notification to allows you to set your camera light to blink whenever you receive a notification Enable the Assistant menu to allow you to improve the device accessibility for users with reduced dexterity Touch and slide th
93. size of font is displayed e Touch key light duration allows you to adjust the delay before he Touch key light automatically turns off Display battery percentage to activate deactivate the display of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of he screen Edit after screen capture allows you to go edit a screen immediately after taking a screen capture Auto adjust screen tone adjusts the phone s LCD brightness level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power e High touch sensitivity allows you to adjust the touch sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of material on the display Changing Your Settings 287 Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Display gt Brightness 2 Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self adjust and tap OK or Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK Assigning a Wallpaper The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen Lock screen or both 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Display gt Wallpaper 2 Select an available option to change its current wallpaper For more information refer to Managing Wallpapers on page 60 288 LED Indicator This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging missed events and incoming notifications
94. software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Products are provided only with restricted rights with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation FAR 52 227 19 15 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of the jurisdiction where you are a resident or if a resident of the United States by the laws of the state of Texas without regard to its conflict of law provisions This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION a Non United States residents If a dispute controversy or difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the Software is not amicably settled it shall be subject to the non exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you are a resident Notwithstanding the foregoing Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief in any jurisdiction b United States residents ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shal
95. tap Settings gt My device tab gt Smart screen 2 Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the features Smart stay disables the screen timeout if your phone detects that your face is watching the screen Smart rotation disables the auto screen rotation by checking the orientation of your face and the device e Smart pause pauses videos when your device detects that your head has moved away from the screen e Smart scroll once your eyes have been detected the screen will scroll according to your device s tilt angle Tap the adjacent field to the right of the Smart scroll field to activate the feature With Smart scroll the screen will scroll depending on the phone s tilt angle once your eyes have been detected Air view With the Air view feature you can hover your finger over the screen and Air view features will be displayed For example you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your calendar to see more details 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Air view 2 Tap the ON OFF icon at the top of your screen to activate Air view RSM 3 The following options are available Tap an option to create a checkmark and activate the feature e Information preview allows you to see information previews extended text and enlarged images when you hover your finger over the screen Note It is recommended that the Information preview function be enabled if using Air v
96. termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 10 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG 11 THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Samsung makes no representations whatsoever about any o
97. the current N wi shooting modes available from with the Share Shot mode Choose from Easy connect Wi Fi Direct or Cancel lt Quick Settings hide Quick settings Taking Dual Camera Photos With the Dual Camera feature you can take a picture with both the front and rear cameras at the same time To take a Dual Camera picture 1 From the camera viewfinder tap wr Dual Camera located at the top left side of the screen The camera viewfinder displays an image from the front facing camera within a mini picture frame on top of the main image displayed from the rear facing camera 2 Tap a Camera until the shutter sounds 154 To resize the front camera image m Touch and hold the mini picture frame until the resize handles appear then drag a corner to enlarge the image To reposition the front camera image m Touch and hold the mini picture frame to detach it and then place it in a desired location Camera and Camcorder Settings This section describes the different settings that you can configure on your camera Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes The available options vary by mode 1 From the viewfinder tap Quick Settings gt Camera Settings The follow settings are located under the Camera Camcorder and General tabs The settings that are displayed will depend on what camera mode you are in Camera e Photo size Select a resolution for phot
98. users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http www ukcosmos org index html Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http www creal cat programes recerca en_projectes creal view php ID 39 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gow Health and Safety Information 337 Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the followi
99. using another Web storage service log into that service first before using Samsung Link 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung Link gt DEVICES amp STORAGE Note When adding storage an N Drive is added Multimedia 193 194 If not already signed into your Cloud storage tap Register storage gt Sign in to your desired service Choose from SugarSync Dropbox or SkyDrive or Press t and then tap Settings gt Registered storage gt Register storage Follow the on screen instructions to register or log into your cloud service Once the process is successfully completed the Web storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main screen From the main screen select a connected device and then tap on the media that you would like to share e A file with N in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services servers To de register Web storage service 1 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung Link gt DEVICES amp STORAGE Press t and then tap Settings gt Registered storage gt Deregister Select a current storage service and tap OK Sharing files via Web Storage Files can be uploaded to a Web storage location by either login into the service and sharing a folder on your computer with the storage location or s
100. weak signal Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty four e You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a 4 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window Media Content has been buffered Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers you can You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set download Media Content to ae TV using HDMI connections out for each piece of content which may be as short as 24 otherwise you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your consecutive hours mobile device output e Stopping pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time Multimedia 175 Using WatchON Important Before initiating use verify you have an active Internet connection available either mobile network or Wi Fi connection Note Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup confirm your TV is turned off For more information refer to www samsungwatchon com Initial Configuration 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap FH Apps gt matenon Note If you are not connected to an active Wi Fi you may be prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile network Click Connect to proceed 3 Select your desired country for your TV Guide s source listi
101. 1 T Task Manger Overview 25 Tethering 276 Active Icon 259 Disconnecting 260 see USB Tethering 259 Text Input Methods 85 Text Input Method Selecting 85 Text Templates 131 Create Your Own 131 Text To Speech 310 Text to speech Configuration 310 Third Party Applications 328 Uninstalling 227 Time Zone Selecting 332 388 Timer Automatic Answering 293 296 Tools Camera 150 TrackPad Configure 311 Transferring Large Files 163 279 Transferring Music Files 191 Translate 121 TranslateMessage Bubble 124 Travel Wallpaper Lock Screen 61 TTS 310 TTY Mode 300 Twitter Personalize Swype 309 Predictive Text 307 U UL Certified Travel Charger 347 Understanding Your Device 27 Back View 30 Display 32 Features 27 Front View 28 Home 40 Side Views 31 Uninstalling Third party applications 227 Unknown Numbers Blocking Messages 130 Unknown Sources 227 Unlock Using Face 282 Using Voice 283 Unmounting SD card 331 Usage Battery 330 USB Connections As Storage Device 255 USB Settings As Storage Device 255 USB Tethering 259 Activating 259 276 Use GPS Satellites 215 221 324 Use Wireless Networks 215 221 324 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 246 Vv Vibrate 294 Activate Deactivate 300 Vibration Create 299 Device 290 Intensity Setup 289 Video Picture In Picture 170 Sharing Videos 169 Volume 289 Videos Options 157 Voice Input Recognition 310 Voice mail Accessing 23 Accessing from another phone
102. 12 Deleting 101 Display Options 110 113 Displaying Contacts by Name 113 375 Export List to microSD 320 First Name 113 Groups 114 Import from microSD 320 Last Name First 113 Merge with Samsung Account 102 Reject List 103 Sending All 107 Setting Default Location 102 Settings 113 Share Namecard Via 103 Sharing Settings 113 Sharing Sending 107 Contacts List 62 Context Menus 100 103 Navigation 54 Using 54 Cookies Emptying 247 Copying Contact 108 Create Folder Group Apps 43 376 Creating a Playlist 190 Creating and sending Messages 118 Customizing Home screens 55 D Data Auto Sync Data 271 Restrict Background Data 271 Data Limit Setting 271 Data Roaming 273 Activate Deactivate 271 273 Data Usage Cycle 271 Limiting 271 Date Selecting Format 332 Date and Time 332 Default Storage Assigning 149 Camcorder 21 149 Camera 21 149 Deleting Multiple Messages 125 Single Bubble 125 Single Message 125 Deleting a contact 101 Deregister Web Storage 194 Desk Clock 203 Configuring 206 Device Calibration 47 314 Reset 323 Device Name Edit 333 Device Options Screen 289 Display Icons 32 Settings 32 Status Bar 32 Using Negative Colors 303 Display Touch Screen 347 Displaying your phone number 62 DivX Locating VOD Number 171 Overview 170 Registering Your DivX Device 171 Registration Code 333 Do cell phones pose a health hazard 335 Dock Sound 302 Downloading New application 225 Downloads 207 Draft M
103. 19 To create a new Google Account from the Web 1 From a computer launch a Web browser and navigate to www google com On the main page click Sign in gt Create an account for free Follow the on screen prompts to create your free account Look for an email from Google in the email box you provided and respond to the email to confirm and activate your new account Signing into Your Google Account 1 20 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Play Store or Gmail Click Existing Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information Tap O Sign in Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information If prompted you can enable the option to stay up to date on news and offers then tap OK Retrieving your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications If you misplace or forget your Google Account password follow these instructions to retrieve it 1 From your computer use an Internet browser and navigate to http google com accounts Click on the Can t access your account link Follow the on screen password recovery procedure Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to the Memory card it is a very good idea to confirm this location before using your device Important Too many users can overlook this storage dest
104. 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Home screen window tap Apps and widgets gt Apps Understanding Your Device 57 4 Scroll across the pages and in a single motion touch and hold an application to place a copy on the current screen To delete a shortcut 1 From the Home screen touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it from its location on the current screen 2 Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab ip and release it Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Note You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the exception of the Apps shortcut To remove a primary shortcut 58 From the Home screen touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace then drag it to an empty space on any available screen The primary shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot To insert a new primary shortcut From the Home screen tap Apps 2 Locate your desired application then touch and hold the on screen icon to position it on a desired screen For more information refer to Managing Shortcuts on page 57 Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as the new primary shortcut Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the screen In a single motion touch and hold the new shortcut then drag it into the empty space within the row of primary shortcuts The new primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and Extended screens Addi
105. 2 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusual physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratches dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from impr
106. 23 Setting up 22 Voice Search 239 310 Voice Typing 85 Configuring 305 Using 94 Voicemail 300 Volume Settings Adjusting 289 VPN Adding 276 Settings 276 VPN Client 240 W Wait 68 101 Adding to a Contact 101 Wait dialing 68 Wallpaper Assign Home 42 Home and Lock Screens 60 Wallpapers Assigning from Gallery 157 Changing Home Screen 60 Changing Lock Screen 61 Changing via Settings Menu 60 Managing 60 Warranty Information 359 WatchON 176 Adding a New Room 179 Changing Channels 177 Configure Just For You 179 Initial Configuration 176 Locating Programs 178 Personalize 179 Settings 178 Using 177 Web 242 History 247 Web applications enable downloading 254 Widget Adding Widgets 42 Widgets Adding and Removing 59 Moving to a Different Screen 59 Settings 235 Stopwatch 205 Wi Fi About 256 Activating 71 256 264 Advanced settings 258 Calling 71 Connecting to 256 389 Deactivating 258 WPA2 PSK 260 261 Direct Connection 268 WPS PIN During Sleep 266 Pairing 268 MAC Address 266 WPS Push Button Manually Adding Network 267 Connect 267 Manually scan for network 258 Pairing 267 Off 258 Y On 161 256 258 264 YouTube Settings 264 High Quality 241 Show Usage 271 High Qulaity 198 Status icons 257 Settings 240 Wi Fi Calling 9 Activating 72 277 Connection Preferences 72 278 Icons 73 Launching 73 On 277 Settings 72 278 Wi Fi Direct 268 Activate and Connect 269 Device Name 18 On 161 269 World Clock DST
107. 3 Direct Call 313 Mute Pause 313 On 46 313 Overview 45 Settings 311 Smart Alert 313 Zoom 313 Mounting the SD card 331 Multi Window Activate Deactivate 48 286 Close App 53 Customizing 50 Increase App Window Size 52 Maximize App 53 Panel Relocation 50 Rearrange Apps 50 382 Removing Apps 50 Restoring Apps 51 Running Multiple Apps 51 Switch Arrangement 52 Tab Repositioning 49 Using 48 Multi Party Call 77 Dropping One Participant 79 Private conversation 78 Multi party call Setting up 77 Multi party calls 77 Multi Tasking Background Calling 63 Watching Videos 170 Music 187 218 Adding Music 190 Creating a Playlist 190 Editing a Playlist 191 Making a Song a Ringtone 188 Options 188 Playing Music 187 Removing Music 190 191 Using Playlists 190 Volume 289 Music App Adding Songs to Playlists 185 Changing Library View 181 Changing Settings 182 Creating a Playlist 185 Deleting a Playlist 185 Listening 182 Music Application 180 Now Playing Screen 183 Options While Playing 184 Playing 183 Playing a Playlist 185 Searching for Music 182 Tab Options 183 Music File Extensions 3GP 187 AAC 187 AAC 187 eAAC 187 M4A 187 MP3 187 MP4 187 WMA 187 Music Files Removing 191 Transferring 191 My Places 215 221 325 N Namecard Sending 107 Sending All 107 Share Via 107 Navigating Application Menus 53 Sub Menus 54 Through Screens 44 Navigation Enable Location 221 Go Home 222 Options 221 Negat
108. 4 or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may detect a buzzing
109. 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions Applications and Development 199 Calendar With this feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook 200 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt 31 Calendar The following tabs are available on the right side of the display e Year displays the Year view e Month displays the Month view e Week displays the Week view e Day displays the Day view e List displays the events in a List view e Task allows you to search for tasks Tap Eq Create event to create a new Calendar event or Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box then press 1 and select one of the following options e Go to displays a specific date e Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event e Search allows you to search within your current events Syne synchronizes your current calendar events with your available accounts such as Gmail Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync etc e Settings displays a list
110. 9 9 Tap Upload from other devices then select the actions you ll take when you upload content from other devices Choose from either Always accept Always ask or Always reject Screen Mirroring With feature enabled you can wirelessly mirror what is currently displayed on your device s screen with an external TV via devices such as the AllShare Cast Hub Note Screen mirroring can only be done with a compatible wireless TV or one enabled with the AllShare Cast Hub For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 196 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Screen Mirroring 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Screen Mirroring slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 280 Note This feature allows a connection between your device and the optional AllShare Cast Hub via a shared Wi Fi Direct connection The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the device s display For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 196 Kies via Wi Fi 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks 2 Tap Kies via Wi Fi gt OK 3 Select a network connection and follow the on screen connection process Lock Screen This menu contains features that allows you to configure the device s security parameters Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone
111. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list 254 Enable Downloading for Web Applications Important Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading For more information refer to nstalling the microSD Memory Card on page 11 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Security gt Unknown sources check box 2 Tap OK to allow install of non Play Store applications Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the installation of non Play Store applications Warning Not all web applications are safe to download In order to protect your phone and data use the Play Store to install web applications For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 225 PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes Media device MTP allows you to transfer media files in Windows or using an Android file transfer on a Mac Camera PTP allows you to transfer photos using the camera software and transfer any files onto a PC that does not support MTP Kies allows you to manage music movies and photos You can also backup precious contacts and calendars download apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your device
112. Address and create the message 3 Review your message and tap BA Send Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information a Note 1 Press and then tap Memo 2 Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save Multi Party calls Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that multiple people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about subscribing to this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call __ 1 From the Home screen tap WS 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap 3 Once connected tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap EJ The first caller is placed on hold 4 Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a multi party call and display in the order in which they were Called Call Functions and Contacts List 77 Important Multiple callers can be joined to a single multi party line Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place each multi party call on hold Having a Private Conversation With One Participant Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling feature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage featu
113. Backup and Reset Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data m From the Home screen press f 1 and then tap Settings gt Jame Accounts tab gt Backup and reset Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab gt Backup and reset 2 Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications 3 Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up 4 Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data 5 Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 323 6 Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 323 Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset Backing Up Your Contacts using an SD card Before initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use Important If you choose to back up contacts to your SIM card all information other than name and number is lost Therefore it is recommended that you back up contacts to your SD card Changing Your Settings 319 To export a Contact list to your microSD
114. Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts style Changing Your Settings 307 e Clear remote data allows you to delete your anonymous data stored on the personalization server e Clear personal data removes all personalized data entered by the user 4 Press gt to return to the previous screen Swype Settings To configure Swype settings 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt tt adjacent to the Swype field 2 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 3 Tap Gestures to view an on screen reference page related to Gesture usage 4 Tap Preferences to alter these settings e Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Sound on keypress tums on sounds generated by the Swype application Show helpful tips turns on a flashing indicator for quick help 308 Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word e Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence e Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Pop up on keypress once enabled displays a character above an on screen key while typing Next word prediction once enabled predicts the next word in your text string based on your current text entries Note If incorrect words ar
115. Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress Displays when a file or application download is in progress Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being shared via Wi Fi Direct For more information referto Camera Options on page 151 Understanding Your Device 35 Displays whenascreencapture has been taken and stored in the clipboard For more information refer to Using Motions and Gestures on page 45 Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified devices Displays when your device is currently sharing streaming media to paired device using the Samsung Link application Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active connected to your device and communicating For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 196 Displays when updates are available for download Displays when a Play Store download has completed 0 A ED E B Eb Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device i
116. Drive 194 Smart Alarm 204 Smart Practices While Driving 342 Smart Switch 27 Snooze 205 Repeat 204 SNS 111 Social Network Adding Facebook Contacts 111 Resync 112 Social Networking Adding Contacts From 111 Software Update 332 Wi Fi 334 Song Set As 188 Sound Adapt Sound 291 Sounds Turn Off All 304 Spam 131 Accessing Your Spam Folder 131 Add a Phrase 128 130 Add Number 120 121 124 Assigning Manually 129 Assigning Phone Numbers 129 Block Unknown Numbers 130 Block Unknown Senders 128 130 Manually Add a Number 128 129 Match Criteria 130 Registering a Phrase as Spam 130 Settings 128 129 Spam Messages 119 Assigning 119 Speakerphone Turning on and off 76 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 340 Speed Dial Changing an entry 70 Making a call 70 Removing an entry 70 Setting up entries 69 Standard Limited Warranty 359 Standard Mode 292 Status Bar 32 Sub Menus Navigation 54 SugarSync 194 SwiftKeyFlow Samsung Keyboard 306 Switching to a Bluetooth During a call 76 Swpe Connect Backup and Sync 309 Swype 85 123ABC Mode 88 ABC Mode 87 Cellular Data 309 Connect 309 Connect Registration 309 Contribute Usage Data 309 Entering Numbers 89 Entering Symbols 89 Entering Text 86 Keyboard Mode 87 Personal Dictionary 309 Preferences 308 Reset Dictionary 308 Select Text Input Mode 87 Settings 308 SYM mode 87 Updates 309 System Volume 289 387 System Manager 323 System Tone Settings 29
117. ERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY YOUR CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE SUCH AS CUSTOM OS SAFE Samsung Approved For Enterprise SAFE SAFE Samsung for Enterprise is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung s own internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security related solutions for MDM and VPN The testing includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device During the testing the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as described by the third party security solution providers The testing for example includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device For more information about Samsung s SAFE program please refer to www samsung com us safe Disclaimer of Warranties EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO LTD SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC AND THEIR AFFILIATES COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULA
118. From the Home screen press r and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Language and input gt Default and select an input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen 2 Tap Select input method and select an available input method Entering Text 85 Entering Text Using Swype Swype is the default text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter lifting your finger between words Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word Swype also includes a touch predictive text system The on screen keyboard options are different between the Android keyboard and Swype on screen input methods Note During its initial use you may be prompted by a series of Swype Connect set up screens Follow the initial on screen set up instructions Enabling and Configuring Swype If you configure another text input method Samsung keyboard you must re enable Swype before using the Swype keyboard For more detailed information on configuring Swype settings see Swype Settings on page 308 86 When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard functionality 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input 2 Tap Default gt Swype Swype Text Entry Tips You can
119. HDR Use this to take photos with richer colors and contrasts by merging images taken at different exposure levels Eraser Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any passers by Panorama Use this to take wide panoramic photos Press the Shutter button to take a photo and then move the camera in any direction When the blue frame aligns with the preview screen the camera automatically takes another shot in the panoramic sequence To stop shooting press the Shutter button again Sports Use this to take fast action photos Night Use this to take brighter clearer pictures in low light settings without the use of the flash 2 From the top of the camera the following shortcuts are available for the camera ae i E Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area If the image is too close the square will turn red Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself Front Camera Dual Camera allows you to activate both the front and rear cameras simultaneously For more information refer to Taking Dual Camera Photos on page 154 Quick Settings activates the Quick Settings menu bar from where you can select several additional settings For more information refer to Quick Settings on page 153 Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The
120. Hub hardware Screen Mirroring with Hub accessory This feature functions with an external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV 1 Connect the AllShare Cast Hub to a power source via the USB Travel Adapter Note The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate it has begun the start up process LED Color Patterns Description Red Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or processing Red Blinking Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby mode ready for connection Blue Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be connected with a new device 2 Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable A to A cable 3 Change the source input on your TV to match the input port used by the incoming HDMI cable Note The television screen should now display an on screen tutorial showing you how to configure your device s AllShare Cast Hub and device settings To activate Screen Mirroring on your device 1 From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Screen Mirroring 2 If not already on tap the Screen Mirroring and then move the slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status Connections Multimedia 197 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home screen tap Apps
121. INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES IN APP PURCHASES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 10 11 12 AND 13 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 14 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as commercial items consisting of commercial
122. M camera pictures and videos Pictures Music Playlists Download etc Select the files that you want to copy and copy them Control C copy to a folder on your PC Control V paste Disconnect the USB cable from your phone and the PC To copy files on your PC back to your phone simply reverse the procedure Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt EN Gallery Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process Backing Up Media to your SD card You can back up your pictures videos documents and other media to your SD card 1 From the Home screen tap Eg Apps gt E My Files Select the folder where the files are that you would like to copy to the SD card This would include folders such as DCIM camera pictures and videos Pictures Music Playlists Download etc For example tap E Apps gt My Files gt Images gt Camera Tap the files that you want to copy to create a checkmark in the box next to the filename Tap the options icon in the top right corner of the display Select Copy gt SD memory card Go to the folder on your SD card where you would like to copy to files to For example Pictures Tap Paste here in the top right corner of the display The files are copied to the folder Changing Yo
123. Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter edit mode or Tap T to start a new memo in text mode with the keypad displayed or tap 2 to start a new memo in drawing mode using your finger or a compatible on screen writing tool You can change back and forth in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen Applications and Development 229 The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the following table Ed Allows you to add free format drawing Displays the keypad to you can add text Kd Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings 5 Undo the last action ra Redo the last action that was undone SAVE Saves the current memo and creates a new one f Changes the view mode 4 Provides access to a quick selection bar Choose from Take picture Images Clipboard Maps Clip art These elements can be used within the memo 8 Make a voice recording to add to the memo Add an additional page to the memo 230 3 From within an active memo press to access the following options Note Depending on whether you have saved the memo are in keypad mode or in handwriting mode the options will appear differently The following is a list of the options you may see e Share via allows you to share your memo as either an Image file jpg PDF file pdf Plain text or S Memo file snb via Group Play Wi Fi Direct Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Flipboard Picasa Google Messaging Gmail or Emai
124. Messaging From within an open message press I to display additional messaging options e Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons e Preview only in MMS allows you to add preview the MMS message prior to delivery e Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as S Memo Calendar Location Contacts and Text templates e Add to Contacts allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry e View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen e Add slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow e Remove slide allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow e Add subject allows you to enter a subject e Duration 5 sec only in MMS allows you to change the duration of the image slideshow e Layout bottom only in MMS allows you to change the layout e Add recipients allows you to enter additional recipients to the message e Delete message allows you to erase either select specific message bubbles or all current messages bubbles e Scheduled message allows you to schedule a time for the current message to be delivered e Add to spam numbers allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder e Discard closes the current open message Note You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to using t
125. Network Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls e Never use Cellular Network Use only Wi Fi for calls Do not use Cellular Network even if available 3 Tap Help from the main Wi Fi Calling Settings page to navigate through either an on screen tutorial or review the top 10 Wi Fi Calling questions 278 Near Field Communication This feature is used to read and exchange tags When used in conjunction with Android Beam your device can be used to beam application content when NFC capable devices are touched 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 Tap the NFC field and verify the feature is active indicated by IRS Android Beam When Android Beam is activated you can beam app content to another NFC capable device by holding the devices close together You can beam browser pages YouTube videos contacts and more 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt NFC gt Android Beam 2 Tap the OFF ON icon to turn Android Beam on 3 Touch the back of your device with another NFC capable device and the content is transferred S Beam This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 From the main Se
126. Operating Environment 353 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 355 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device 0005 356 FCC Notice and Cautions 357 Other Important Safety Information 357 Section 12 Warranty Information 359 Standard Limited Warranty 359 End User License Agreement for Software 364 WING ON ai 372 Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing and charging the battery installing the micro SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using your device for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery and install the micro SIM card The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your phone A robust index for features begins on page 372 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 335 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigatio
127. Places displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more 1 From the Home screen tap Eg Apps gt 9 Local 2 Tap Q Search and then use the Search Maps field to manually enter a desired place or choose from among the various categories Matches are filtered by those closest to your current location 3 Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches RECOMMENDATIONS or IN THIS AREA a list of places within this category displays 4 Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature 5 Press 1 and then tap Add a search The functions adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen 214 Lookout Security Lookout Security provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that are unique to the mobile market Along with the antivirus and anti malware tech there s a lost and stolen phone locator service an application privacy adviser and a backup service 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt S Lookout Security 2 Tap Next Read the on screen descriptions and activate those desired features Tap Next to progress to the next screen 4 Tap Done to complete the setup 5 Create a Lookout account by enteri
128. Play Tap Join group Your device then scans for available groups for you to join Select a group to join Once connected you can then select the shared content and interact with your group s shared media Press and select Help for additional information Help Internet Provides access to built in Help information Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the o Help Internet browsing feature on your phone 2 Select an on screen topics for more information m From the Home screen tap 35 Apps gt e New features provides help on all of the new features and Internet applications such as Motion Camera Group Play etc For more information refer to Internet on page 242 e Basics provides basic information on using your device e Applications provides information on how to use basic applications like Contacts Email S Memo Internet Camera etc e Settings provides information on settings for Wi Fi Bluetooth Ringtone Power saving mode NFC Air gesture Air view Smart screen Motion and Screen Mirroring e Online help provides more detailed online help for additional questions you may have e Available accessories provides information on accessories for your phone that are available for purchase Applications and Development 213 Local Local formerly known as Google
129. R PURPOSE INTEROPERABILITY OR NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES In addition information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with among other things the e mail platform master data management and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider solution provider or user Choice of an e mail master data management and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider solution provider or user For complete statement of limited warranty please refer to www samsung com us safe available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab devices are sold 101212 Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein Rd Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http www samsung com 9013 Sa
130. Samsung GALAXY G 4 available at T Mobile 4G LTE SMARTPHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference elie Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License GPL GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL License BSD License and other op
131. Screen Assigning a New 56 Changing Wallpaper 60 Menu Settings 42 Overview 40 Home screens Customizing 55 Homepage Setting New 246 l Icons Description 32 Indicator 32 Status 32 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 166 Assigning as wallpaper 166 Transferring 321 Verifying 321 Importing and Exporting To micro SIM card 113 379 In Call Options 74 In call Options 76 Incognito 245 Create Window 245 Exit Window 245 Incoming Call Vibration Setting 289 Indicator icons 32 International Call 67 International Calls Making 67 Internet 242 Brightness Setting 243 Search 244 Set Home Page 248 Set New Homepage 246 Internet Email 131 IP Address 332 IR Smart Remote 27 380 J Joining Contact information 104 L Language Select 305 Latitude 216 LDAP 102 Live Wallpaper Selecting 60 Local 214 Location Settings 217 Lock Pattern If Forgot My Pattern 285 Lock Screen 281 Changing Wallpaper 61 Say Wake Up Command 281 Shortcuts 281 Viewing Missed Calls 84 Logs 81 Accessing 81 Accessing from Notifications 82 Altering Numbers 83 Erasing 83 Lookout Security 214 Low battery indicator 15 LTE Network Mode 273 Selecting 274 LTE Network 274 M Making Emergency Calls 64 International Calls 67 New call 62 Managing Applications Clearing Application Cache 328 Uninstalling Third party Applications 328 Market see Play Store 225 Marking contact As a default 106 Media Backing Up to microSD Card 321 Backing
132. Settings 205 390
133. Software update information screen 3 Select an available option Note You configure the device s software update parameters Cancel Tap this option to cancel the operation Wi Fi settings Enable this option to only download available updates via an active Wi Fi connection If disabled the device will begin available downloads via its T Mobile connection e OK Tap this option to connect to the remote server detect if there is an available update the begin the download over your existing data connection Software updates can include bug fixes enhancements to services to the device or currently installed software 334 Section 11 Health and Safety Information This device is capable of operating in Wi Fi mode in the 2 4 and 5 GHz bands The FCC requires that devices operating within 5 15 5 25 GHz may only be used indoors not outside in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services MSS Therefore do not use this device outside as a Wi Fi hotspot or in Wi Fi Direct mode outside when using the 5 15 5 25 GHz band This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this information before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF
134. Tethering and Mobile HotSpot For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 259 For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 260 276 VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Note Before using VPN you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or password For more information refer to Security on page 325 Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP L2TP IPSec PSK L2TP IPSec RSA IPSec Xauth PSK IPSec Xauth RSA IPSec Hybrid RSA Important Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 If prompted read the screen lock information and follow the on screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password 3 Tap E Add VPN network 4 Inthe form that appears fill in the information provided by your network administrator 5 Tap Save Note Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types Connecting to a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to 3 Enter any requested credentials into the pop up that opens 4 Tap Connect Edit a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit In the pop up that open
135. This feature is optimized for use with the on screen QWERTY keyboard e Cursor control when enabled allows you to control your on screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard e Handwriting allows you to configure the handwriting settings such as Recognition type Recognition time Pen thickness Pen color and About Advanced provides access to additional settings such as Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen QWERTY keyboard Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key Key tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an on screen key Key tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on screen key e Help launches a brief on screen help tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard e Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration Predictive Text Advanced Settings The predictive text system provides next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyb
136. Touch and slide O in any direction to reject the call e Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to create a new custom outgoing response Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer Call Functions and Contacts List 65 If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts the entry s name is displayed You may also see the caller s phone number if available Touch and drag upward to reject with a message Touch and slide in any direction to answer the Touch and slide call in any direction to reject the call Create new message 66 Answering a call with Air Gesture 1 Verify the Air Gestures feature is on and Air call accept is active For more information refer to Using Motions and Gestures on page 45 2 Atthe incoming call screen wave your hand over the screen to accept the incoming call e If active the Air call accept icon YW appears at the top of the incoming call screen Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen tap WS 2 Press r and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection 3 Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your a
137. UCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Warranty Information 361 What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitrati
138. Use secure connection SSL field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option should be enabled 138 Important If your Exchange server requires this feature leaving this field unchecked can prevent connection 9 Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the Use client certification option 10 With the new server information entered tap Next 11 Read the on screen Activation disclaimer and when prompted tap OK The device then verifies your incoming server settings 12 If prompted read the Remote security administration information and tap OK to accept the service and continue 13 Adjust the various on screen configuration fields and tap Next It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load e Enabling the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi option decreases the wait time to access large email attachments 14 If prompted read the Activate device administrator screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup process Note This process can take a few minutes If the previous setup screen re appears ignore it and do not alter any fields during this process 15 Identify your new work email account with a unique name Ex Work then tap Done Opening an Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap EEE gt Email 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page 3 Select
139. When the battery level becomes too low the device automatically turns off The on screen battery charge is represented by default as a colored battery icon You can also choose to display a percentage value Having a percentage value on screen can provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery m Press gt j and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Display gt Display battery percentage For more information refer to Display Settings on page 286 Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time Turn Bluetooth off when not in use Turn Wi Fi off when not in use e Deactivate the GPS when not needed Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery e Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery Turn off Automatic application sync Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface functions Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources Check the Running Services
140. a hands free device Secure your phone within easy reach e Place calls when you are not moving e Plan calls when your car will be stationary e Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations e Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary e Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalties or other damages Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Health and Safety Information 343 Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to http www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the conti
141. a song the Now playing screen displays There are various options and controls available while a song is playing 1 From within the Play Music application tap an album or song 2 From the Now playing screen press Menu to display the following options l e Equalizer applies selected equalizer features such as FX booster Bass boost and 3D effect e Clear queue clears the current queue e Save queue stores the current queue e Settings Allows you to view and assign various music settings and view different application specific information e Help Provides an on screen series of related help topics 184 3 Tap d gt Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist Tap H gt P gt Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to control the playback of songs albums and playlists Tap to go back to the previous song Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song Tap to resume playback Tap to pause playback Tap to advance to the next song Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When disabled as shown songs play in the order they appear in List view Also visible when is tapped XE zisfiz When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When enabled songs play in random order Also visible when H is tappe
142. able or disable the feature by placing a check mark in the Allow diagnostics to be collected field 4 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Changing Your Settings 323 Important Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Back up and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow diagnostics to be collected feature Location Services The Location services allows you to configure the device s location services Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Location services 2 Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and activate the service e Access to my location allows apps that have asked your permission to use your location information Tap the ON OFF slider to turn it on 324 e Use GPS satellites allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your location e Use wireless networks allows applications to use data from mobile networks and Wi Fi to help determine your location e My places allows you to add location information for your Home Office and Car Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to
143. ack of the multimedia message tap 9 In a single motion touch and drag up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the screen Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the top To reply to a text message 1 From the Home screen tap WP 2 While the message is Current Recipient My Text 08 11 2015 The Gwertyutop Lae SRR Taeixevbum a Sym lt a Reply Bubble Text Message Thread ws open tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message Messages 123 3 Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your caller s replies are Yellow 4 Tap EA Send to deliver your reply or Press 1 and then select one of the available message options page 119 To access message thread options m From the main Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options e View contact displays the Contact s Overview page e Add to contact begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list e Delete thread deletes the currently selected message thread e Add to spam numbers adds the current sender to a spam l
144. adjust the noise reduction feature Activating this feature can improve the quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise 1 Tap W Noise reduction off to toggle the status and activate the feature 2 Tap Bd Noise reduction on to toggle the status and deactivate the feature Personalizing the Call Sound Setting During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the current call 1 Tap e Personalize call sound 2 Confirm the option is enabled Note If prompted to enable the feature via the Call settings menu go to Call settings gt Personalize call sound 3 Select an available option Choose from Adapt Sound Soft sound Clear sound and Off Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history 2 Once connected tap Add call to dial the second call 3 Dial the new phone number and tap ca To switch between the two calls m Tap Swap The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold The new active call displays a green background behind the number Ca
145. all your accounts Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization Tap Settings to access your account settings Changing Your Settings 317 Cloud This feature allows you to use your external cloud storage solution to both synchronize your device to your Samsung account and then backup that local content to the cloud Your device comes with a built in Cloud storage solution known as Dropbox Important This feature requires an active Wi Fi connection 1 318 prior to use Log into your Samsung account and verify it is active For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 Log into your external cloud storage solution In our case we are using a Dropbox account For more information refer to Dropbox on page 207 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Accounts tab gt Cloud Confirm your Samsung account appears at the top of the screen Tap Sync settings select which device parameters will be synched and tap Sync now Choose from Sync Calendar Sync Contacts Sync Internet bookmarks Sync Internet opened pages and Sync Memo Tap Backup or Restore to launch the feature e Backup manually loads up the currently selected categories and backs up the data to your cloud storage location Tap Backup to begin the manual backup process e Restore allows you to retrieve your previously backed up data from your Samsung account and then download it to your device
146. ally synchronizes its contents across all of your connected devices on your account Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer and its automatically updated to the same folder on your other devices Download the Desktop application 1 Use your computer s browser to navigate to http www dropbox com 2 Follow the on screen setup and installation instructions on your target computer containing the desired files Applications and Development 207 Important The computer application must be installed on the computer containing the desired files This computer must have an active Internet connection Note It might be necessary to configure your router s firewall settings to allow this application to gain access to the Internet Accessing Dropbox on your Device ac 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt gt lt Dropbox gt Start 2 Tap I m already a Dropbox user enter your current account credentials and tap Log in Soe Tap I m new to Dropbox and follow the on screen instructions to register for a new account 3 Follow the on screen instructions 208 4 Initially you will need to configure your Camera Upload parameters Choose from Wi Fi only or Wi Fi or data plan e Tap Turn on after making your selection Caution Enabling this feature can incur data charges depending on your plan if the Wi FI or data plan is selected 5 Tap 3 Access Dropbox at the top of the application window to
147. and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device consult your health care provider For more information see http Avww fcc gov oet rfsafety rf fags html Health and Safety Information 353 Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion 35
148. ange the current Home screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen or Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Home screen window tap Set wallpaper gt Home screen 4 Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper e Tap Wallpapers scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper 60 Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Display gt Wallpaper or Touch and hold an empty area of the screen and select Set wallpaper 2 Choose from Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screen Note The Home and lock screens is an additional option that allows you to change both screens at the same time 3 Select a wallpaper type Gallery Live wallpaper or Wallpapers 4 Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper To change the current Lock screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen touch and hold an empty area of the screen and tap Set wallpaper gt Lock screen or From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Display gt Wallpaper gt Lock screen Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to select from a use
149. arbuds Health and Safety Information 351 Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume increases less time is required before you hearing could be affected Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises such as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal e Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 20190 Voice 800 222 2336 Email info audiology org Internet http www audiology org Pages default aspx 352 National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 Email nidcdinfo nih gov Internet http www nided nih gov National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington DC 20201 Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 Outside the U S 513 533 8328 Email cdcinfo cdc gov Internet http www cdc govw niosh topics noise default
150. ark not important assigns the current email an important status e Mute mutes the conversation e Report spam reports the Email message as spam e Report phishing reports the Email message as a phishing email attempt e Settings allows you to configure the General or Notification settings e Send feedback sends feedback to Google e Help launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information Creating an Additional Gmail Account 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Mad Gmail 2 Press and then tap Settings gt ADD ACCOUNT and follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section For more information refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 142 144 Google Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts Note Before using this application you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap ae gt tax Talk Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 142 2 Begin using Google Talk Note The Network confirms your login and processes This could take up to 5 minutes to complete ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where you
151. as also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringing in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device e Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately e Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using e
152. as well Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone e Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF Safety Program htto Awww fcc gov oet rfsafety Health and Safety Information 339 e Environmental Protection Agency EPA http www epa gov radtown wireless tech html e Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http Awww osha gov SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH http Awww cdc gov niosh World Health Organization WHO http Awww who int peh emf en e International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection http www icnirp de e Health Protection Agency h
153. ation Locating Your VOD Registration Number 1 2 3 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt About device gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register Write down your Registration code Tap OK Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased Movies To play purchased DivX movies on your device you will first need to complete a one time registration using both your device and your computer 1 Write down the Divx registration code that appears on screen Copy this 8 or 10 digit number down Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your computer Download the free player for your computer from www divx com Open the DivX Player on your computer and from within the VOD menu select Register a DivX Certified Device You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your account information has not already been saved in DivX Player Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration code from step 2 and create a device nickname ex Pat or Pat s Device Select a location on your computer to download the DivX registration video with the same title as your device nickname ex Pat divx Follow the on screen instructions to download the file and initiate the transfer process You will need to place this video file onto your device and play it back Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this video Multimedia 171
154. ation 4 Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Done Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selected for dialing Sending a Namecard ANamecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap 2i 2 Tapa Contact entry 3 Press 11 and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox if enabled Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap Ey 2 Press and then tap Import Export gt Share namecard via 3 Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap Done and select a delivery method e Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth compatible device e ChatON to send the contacts to selected buddies e Dropbox if activated is us
155. ay be found at http www epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone index htm or at http Awww call2recycle org 346 Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label Just go to http www samsung com us aboutsamsung citizenship usactivities environment_samsungrecyclingdirect html INT ST A recyle your phone page and follow the instructions to print out a free pre paid postage label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S Mail for recycling Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations In some areas the disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help us protect the environment recycle THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION Display Touch Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
156. ays in the recipient field Note Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their name number in the recipient area and selecting Delete 118 Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field or 2 and selecting recipients Tap the Enter message field and use the on screen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 85 Review your message and tap RZA Send If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you send it it will be automatically saved as a draft Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap ga Contacts Locate an entry from the Contacts list In a single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the left This action addresses a new text message to the selected recipient Message Options Options before composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap a Messaging Before composing a message from the main Message screen press from the main Messaging screen to display additional messaging options e Search allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap A For more information refer to Message Search on page 126 e De
157. ble the feature Call alerts 1 From the main Call settings page tap Call alerts 2 Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate when the called party answers the phone Choose from Answer vibration or Call end vibration 3 Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call then tap OK Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone 4 Tap Alerts on calls to turn off alarm and message notifications during a call Changing Your Settings 295 Accessory settings for call 1 From the main Call settings page tap Call accessories 2 The following options are available e Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected e Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call e Outgoing call conditions allows you to make calls even when the device is locked Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new SIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes m For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 71 296 Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 2 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings Tap
158. can be used during playback of supported video types via either the Gallery Play Videos or Video player Note Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in the foreground ex Camera Camcorder screen This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a background operation while you multi task and do other things such as surf the Internet access your Contacts list look for a picture etc 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps 2 Tap the desired video playback application 3 Tap the desired video to begin playback 170 Note The Picture In Picture feature only works when using the Video player application Other video players ex YouTube do not support this feature 4 As playback is initiated locate and tap Picture in Picture from the bottom right of the playback screen Your current video is then sent to foreground of any new page and most application screens 5 The video disappears from the screen once it ends DivX Overview This device is able to playback DivX videos DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium content If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device the message Authorization Error will be displayed and your content will not play Learn more at www divx com vod Your device must first be registered to playback protected or purchased DivX content DRM free or unprotected content does not required DivX VOD registr
159. cape orientation The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen QWERTY keyboard displays The Samsung Keyboard This device has a built in QWERTY keypad portrait mode or keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keyboard 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Language and input gt Default gt Samsung keyboard or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select EW Select input method gt Samsung keyboard 90 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input Text input field Shift key Input Mode Current Mode Send Delete Indicator Input Options Settings For more detailed information on configuring Samsung Keyboard settings see Samsung Keyboard Settings on page 306 Entering Text using Different Input Options Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard is to use the on screen keys you have other options Note To access settings touch and hold the Input Methods button E then ta
160. card 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK The contacts will be stored in a vcf file on your SD card For more information refer to Export Import on page 113 To copy contacts from an SD card back to your device 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export gt Import from USB storage 3 At the Save contact to prompt tap Device The contacts on the SD card are copied to your phone 320 Backing Up Media to your PC You can back up your pictures videos documents and other media to your PC You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and copy files back and forth between your phone and PC If you insert an SD card in the device you can also access the files directory from the SD card by using your device as a memory card reader 1 Connect the USB cable to your device then connect the cable to your PC USB port After a few seconds a pop up window displays on the PC when it is connected with your device On the PC pop up click Open device to view files Verify your device appears as a removable disk on your PC Once connected you can access the Phone folder internal phone memory and the Card folder SD card Select the location where the files are that you would like to copy to your PC Phone or Card Select the folders where the information is kept This would include folders such as DCI
161. ce is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks 272 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Airplane mode slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap OK The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of your screen Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks The following options display Use mobile data Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Mobile data Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network or Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature Access Point Names To access a wireless access point m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Acces
162. cessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile device is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bending or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories Health and Safety Information 357 e For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wire
163. choose the best part to start from Alarm tone 188 Music Options The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays With the application displayed and playing a song press and select one of the following options e Via Bluetooth scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset Share music allows you to share music with others via the Group Play application All users must be connected to the same Wi Fi For more information refer to Group Play on page 211 e Add to playlist allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist Set as allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone Caller ringtone or Alarm tone Additionally you can either choose to start the selected song from the beginning or allow the application to automatically recommend a start point e Show Hide Music view displays an on screen waveform timeline of the current song e Scan for nearby devices allows you to look for DLNA compliant devices used to control streaming media e Settings allows you to change your music player settings e Details allows you to view media info such as Artist Title Album Track length Genre Track number Format Size and Location e End closes the application Music Settings The settings menu allows you to set preferences for t
164. clude attachments when forwarding an email e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G LTE network connection e Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails The default is 3 auto resends e Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings for various folders such as Inbox Drafts Outbox etc e Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events Choose from 2 weeks 1 month 3 months 6 months or All calendar e Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account s trash bin remotely e Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server e Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server e Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server Messages 141 e In case of sync conflict allows you to assign the master source on emails If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails Server has p
165. ctivate Bluetooth view or assign a device name activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover it or scan for other available Bluetooth devices with which to pair For more information refer to Bluetooth on page 250 Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on a 1 From the Home screen press S and then tap Settings gt S gt Connections tab 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area Changing Your Settings 269 To turn Bluetooth off _ 1 From the Home screen press 1 1 and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Changing the Device Name __ 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt More tab gt About device 2 Tap the Device name field and use the on screen keyboard to edit the current device name 3 Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 4 Tap OK to confirm your setting 270 Activating Visibility 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Bluetooth 2 Verify your Bluetooth is active From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices t
166. cts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry Contacts 105 Unjoining a Contact 1 2 Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name 3 From the Home screen tap i Tap a contact name the account name from which you want to unjoin an entry This reveals the details for entry or account information Tap the Connection area Press and then tap Separate contact Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin and select OK The contacts are unjoined or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed 106 Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Tapa Contact entry 3 Press 11 and then tap Mark as default The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact inform
167. cur while the phone is turned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device p going y Indicates any received calls that were answered y Indicates a missed call K Indicates any received calls that were rejected O Q Indicates auto rejected calls Call Functions and Contacts List 81 Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area 1 Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 3 Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen This list provides easy access to redial an entry or you can also choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how they are touched Call logs Caller Overview e Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen e Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e View contact to view the Contact details for the current entry Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the current number e Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry 82 Tim
168. d Tap to repeat the current song repeat all songs or disable repeat mode Also visible when B is tapped MAA B Creating a Playlist 1 From within the Play Music application tap an album or song list and play a song 2 Tap H gt adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 3 Tap New playlist gt Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist 4 Tap OK to save the new playlist Adding Songs to Playlists 1 From within the Play Music application tap an album or song list and play a song 2 Tap gt P adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 3 Select the desired target playlist Playing a Playlist 1 From within the Play Music application select the PLAYLISTS tab 2 Tap P next to a playlist title and tap Play Deleting a Playlist 1 From within the Play Music application display the PLAYLISTS library view 2 Tap P next to a playlist title and tap Delete Multimedia 185 Shopping for Music at the Play Store To visit the Google Play Store where you can find and buy music m From within the Play Music application tap Play Store in the Application Bar The Google Play Store music section displays Making Online Music Available Offline In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library you can play music stored on your device s internal storage Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection To do this make some of your online music ava
169. d Communication feature found on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device by direct touch This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be enabled prior to use For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 163 Enabling Share Shot Share shot is a Wi Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple users can Wi Fi connect their devices and then all share each others pictures in real time This is really useful in group events ex family gathering or company party where you don t want to have to email everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later date For more information refer to Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings on page 268 The general process is e Enable Wi Fi Direct communication e Pair your device with other users e Enable Share shot To enable Wi Fi Direct Important The target device must already be connected to the same Wi Fi and have its Wi Fi Direct feature active and scanning before you can your pairing 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct 4 Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device or Tap Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device names to begin the connecti
170. d and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account Messages 131 IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard POPS Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POP3 is the current standard Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization 132 Creating an Internet Email Account 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Mo Email E 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add account Account name ga Inbox A Loading messages Access available accounts and folders Enter your Email address and Password information e Email address your Internet email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive 3 Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field e Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POP3 or IMAP Follow the on screen
171. d tap Accept 3 Choose from the following on screen options e Driving Walking Bicycling tap to configure the method of travel Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions e Speak destination allows you to use the voice recognition feature to search for matching locations in your area Applications and Development 221 Type destination allows you to manually enter a destination address via the on screen keypad e Go home allows you to return to a designated Home location When prompted initially to setup a home address enter the location into the Enter an address field and tap Save Map enables the on screen real time map functionality Navigation Map options Once on the map screen you can access the following features Destination returns you to the previous Navigation options screen Search by voice Speak your destination instead of typing Layers allows you to switch map views e Traffic view available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving e Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old 222 e Parking displays parking information relative to your current location e Gas station
172. d to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines This mobile phone has a FCC ID number A3LSGHM919 Model Number SGH M919 and the
173. dding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged Important Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen To delete a screen a 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold then drag the undesired screen up to the Remove tab hip 3 Press to return to the main Home screen To add a screen 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Edit page 2 Tap Add screen The newly added screen appears as the last page 3 Press to return to the main Home screen 56 Rearranging the Screens 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Edit page f 2 Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen position 1 and bottom right is screen last screen Assigning a New Home Screen _ 1 From the Home screen press T and then tap Edit page 2 Tap of The new Home screen then indicates this Es Home screen icon at the top of the selected screen Sharing an App The device s Applications menu now comes with a feature that allows you to share information about your selected applications with external users 1 From the Home screen tap Apps 2 Press and then tap Share apps 3 Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to share information about and tap Done No
174. deos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video you can access various options Photo viewing options 1 Tap a thumbnail to view the picture Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 2 The following options are available at the top of the screen e Share via lt i allows you to share the picture via ChatON Group Play Bluetooth Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Messaging Picasa S Memo and Wi Fi Direct e Edit Es allows you to edit the current image Launches the Photo Editor application For more information refer to Editing a Photo on page 167 e Delete T allows you to delete the current picture 3 Press for additional options such as Favorite allows you to assign the current image as a favorite Slideshow allows you to see your photos in a slideshow Photo frame takes the current image and creates a surrounding photo frame that can be edited with edited text or drawn object then saved Photo note allows you to write notes on your current image and then save it Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer Rename allows you to rename the current file Set as allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo Home screen Lock scr
175. e Pattern options Once an unlock pattern is enabled additional options are available e Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed on your home screens e Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you draw it e Lock automatically allows you to set a time out for lock screen e Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen by pressing e What If Forget my Pattern If you forget your device s lock pattern you can unlock your device or reset it using your Google Account credentials When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that says Forgot pattern Follow these steps to use either your PIN or email address Important You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before the device is locked Important If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or unlocking your device please contact T Mobile for assistance To unlock your device with a PIN code 1 Tap Forgot pattern located at the bottom of the screen 2 Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the on screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when you created your lock pattern 3 Tap OK 4 Ifyou have forgotten your current pattern tap Pattern from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures outlined in Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 283 to create a new pattern To un
176. e They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it What s New provides access to the Play Store from where you can update the application manually About displays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc Feedback allows you to provide application feedback Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy or Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu e Help provides help information Applications and Development 217 Messaging This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt bad Messaging For more information refer to Messages on page 117 Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your device m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Ci Messenger For more information refer to Messenger on page 147 218 Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and Mobile HotSpot menu where you can use either the
177. e opposite direction over the screen Multimedia 165 Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper 1 From the Home screen tap Eee Apps gt Dn 1 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt EK Gallery Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press and then tap 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Set as gt Contact photo Set as 4 Tap a contact to make a selection 4 Select one of the these options 5 Use the on screen crop the image by dragging it e Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen around or out from its corners background This image is spread across all available screens 6 Tap Done to store the new image e Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen e Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home screen and Lock screens 5 Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area 6 Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image or Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image 166 Editing a Photo You can edit your photos using the built in Photo editor application on your device The photo editor application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic ima
178. e Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung Link gt DEVICES amp STORAGE 2 Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired e Registered storage allows you to add a Web storage location Without a storage service location added you will not be able to use Samsung Link My device displays your device name as it is used with Samsung Link Tap to change the device name e Save to allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory or to an SD card e Auto upload allows you to enable automatic upload of images from your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage list Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature e Video optimization allows you to setup the video quality for streamed video content Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature Password lock allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung account password Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature My account displays Samsung account information a e Customer support allows you to contact the Samsung Lin team via a new email from an available email account e About this service displays application information Setting Up Web Storage Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store your files and share them on the Cloud Note If you are
179. e Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad screen use one of the following options e Voicemail Ee to access your Voicemail service e Call amp J to call the entered number e Delete a to delete digits from the current number To view additional dialing options m After entering a number tap 1 e Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active e Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry e Speed dial setting to access the Speed dialing setting menu where you can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry e Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed Tip You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses e Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the phone waits for your input A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes e Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen Answering a Call When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or name if stored in Contacts List displays m Atthe incoming call screen e Touch and slide Y in any direction to answer the call
180. e an emergency call 1 If the mobile device is not on switch it on 2 From the Home screen tap WW 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location for example 911 or other official emergency number Emergency numbers vary by location 4 Tap KE If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device Health and Safety Information 349 may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do So Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an elec
181. e being entered as you type disabled this feature Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary e Version displays the software version information 5 Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English e Living language allows you to automatically update Swype with popular new words Tap OK to continue the process 6 Tap Swype Connect to activate social media personalization and configure data settings e Register now allows you register for the Swype Connect service which allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices Follow the on screen instructions to backup and sync your dictionary based on an email address Enter the activation code received after your email has been confirmed e Backup amp Sync when active allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices e Contribute usage data when enabled allows the Nuance application to collect usage data for better word predictions e Cellular data when enabled activates cellular data usage by the Swype application so it can receive program updates language downloads and other related features via your existing data connection Tap Personalization to access and manage your personal dictionary Log into the available accounts to add help personalize your p
182. e managed or updated remotely online vs via the device These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap 2 gt Ea 2 3 Tap a group entry gt ok Add group member From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Done The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Group POR gt 5 From the Home screen tap 2 gt EJ Tap a group entry Press r and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Done The contacts are removed from the group Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap 2 gt Ea Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern fields or Add member Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 go Pon 6 py From the Home screen tap 32 gt Ea Press El and then tap Delete groups Select either Select all or tap the desired group Tap Delete Select either the Group only or Group and group members Tap OK Sending a Message to a Group 1 2 From the Home screen tap 2 gt
183. e number e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Groups Ringtone Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization Email IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry t Tap Cancel to delete the current entry To save a Number from your Keypad 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap N Phone Enter a phone number using the on screen dialpad Tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list or Press and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list Contacts 97 e f you re updating an existing contact tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5 4 Tap a destination type Device SIM Samsung account Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync depending on where you want to save the new contact information 5 Tap the Name and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad e Tap v to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix 6 Tap the image ico
184. e policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP Changes may affect the performance of location based technology on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positioning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s network and therefore 348 airtime data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information may be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and R
185. e provides the time and date of the call and its duration e Copy to dialing screen press I to pass the current number to your dialer and then edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call e Delete press to delete the Contacts entry Send number press I to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient e Add to reject list press 0 add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu e Copy to dialing screen to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial e Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry e Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient e Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone e Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list Altering Numbers from the Logs List If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number 1 From the Home screen tap gt Logs tab 2 To
186. e service The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send and receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Important During the creation of a text message adding an image sound file or video clip automatically changes it from a text message SMS to a multimedia message MMS Message Icons on the Status Bar Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 32 Note The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping E3 Apps gt amp Messaging Messages 117 Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the Home screen tap g Messaging gt A Compose 2 Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or Tap 2 to select from one of the following e Groups to select a recipient from the Group list e Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list e Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address e Logs to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages 3 If adding a recipient from either Logs Contacts or Group tap the contact to place a check mark then tap Done The contact displ
187. e slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action Choose from Short Medium or Long Enable Interaction control to allows you to enable or disable motions and screen timeout You can also block areas of the screen from touch interaction Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions Language and Input Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options From the Home screen press r and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Language and input Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select a language and region from the list Choose Input Method 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt Default 2 Select an input method or Tap Set up input methods to alter modify the available input methods Configure Google Voice Typing 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select Ey Select input method gt Set up input methods 2 Tap to adjacent to the Google voice typing fi
188. e text mode button displays i There are up to 2 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping aye Entering Text 91 Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap to toggle capitalization t All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space 92 Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Once in this mode the text input type shows Ba Note After typing an initial uppercase character the ij key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard you make a mistake tap KJ to erase a single character 4 Tap Ea Touch and hold al to erase an entire word Send to deliver the message Using SymbollNumeric Mode Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays ABC 1 From a screen where you can e
189. e to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing the PIN2 Code 1 go Pon From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers 2 Tap Enable FDN 3 At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK FDN is enabled 4 Tap FDN list then press 1 and then tap Add contact or edit the contacts that were stored Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Ringtones and keypad tones 1 From the main Call settings page tap Ringtones and keypad tones 2 Tap Ringtones select a ringtone and tap OK e Tap Add to locate an audio file to create as a ringtone 3 Tap Vibratio
190. each of the applications on your device and clear the data cache or defaults m From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager Clearing application cache and data 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling third party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager gt Downloaded 2 Tap the third party application and from the Application info screen tap Uninstall Applications and Development 227 POLARIS Office 5 Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline The application can also open Adobe PDF Portable Document Format files 1 3 228 From the Home screen tap FH Apps gt D POLARIS Office 5 From the Registration screen enter your Email information if desired and tap Register to complete the process or Tap Skip to ignore this registration The main Polaris Office screen displays Follow the on screen instructions to use Polaris Office On its initial launch navigate the application to begin use e New creates a new office document e Recent documents provide
191. ecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a Health and Safety Information 355 hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating the sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly oe EEE S SS 356 The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses However there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locatio
192. ect an email account and tap an email message Messages 133 Refreshing Email messages 1 From the Home screen tap Ea gt Email 2 Select an email account e If you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Select an available email account 3 Tap Refresh Composing Email 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Email 2 Tap account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page 3 Tap Inbox gt Compose 4 Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e If you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want 5 Tap Add Cc Bec to add additional carbon copy and blind copy recipients e Use the Ce field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients 6 Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject 134 7 Tap the email text field and compose your email message e To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap gt to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap either
193. ecurity option This kG communicating with a Wireless Access Point must match the current security setting on your target WAP WAP DR Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an 4 Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure ag available open wireless network 5 Tap Connect to store the new information and connect PS Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and to the target WAP configured for a direct connection to another eS compatible device in the same direct Note No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the communication mode second time to connect to a previously accessed or Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and secured wireless network The WAP key is required communicating when the device is reset using factory default settings Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating DEN Connections 257 Deactivating Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Connections tab In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the left to turn it off Activate and Deactivate Wi Fi from the Notification bar Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times Manually Scan for a Wi Fi Network de 258 From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Wi Fi In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on Tap Sca
194. ed off fo Using Auto Area Code This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls When enabled the designated prefix is always added before your dialed numbers Ex If you were using 999 as your area code 555 5555 would be dialed as 999 555 5555 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Auto area code enter a new prefix and then tap OK Call Barring Configures the device to barr prevent selected outbound calls 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings 2 Tap Call barring and select from the available settings Choose from All outgoing calls International calls Intl calls except home All incoming calls or Incoming when roaming Changing Your Settings 297 Call Waiting 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings Tap Call waiting to enable disable the on screen notification of new incoming call during an active call Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card 298 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers Tap Enable FDN Atthe prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phon
195. ed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed 1 2 84 Press o Power End to reactivate the screen Touch and drag the button with the number of missed calls on it anywhere on the screen The Logs tab is then displayed Section 4 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your device This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Your device also provides several on screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier Text Input Methods There are three text input methods available e Google voice typing provides a voice to text interface Samsung keyboard default an on screen QWERTY keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation Swype is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the on screen keyboard Instead of tapping each key use your finger to trace over each letter of a word The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu m
196. ed to the Software provided to you if any such as IMEI your device s unique identification number device number model name customer code access recording your device s current SW version MCC Mobile Country Code MNC Mobile Network Code Samsung and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Samsung s Privacy Policy which can be viewed at http account samsung com membership pp 5 SOFTWARE UPDATES Samsung may provide to you or make available to you updates upgrades supplements and add on components if any of the Software including bug fixes service upgrades parts or whole products or devices and updates and enhancements to any software previously installed including entirely new versions collectively Update after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance your user experience with your device This EULA applies to all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software unless we provide other terms along with such Update To use Software provided through Update you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Sam
197. ed to upload the entries to your remote Dropbox Web storage location Note The Web storage Upload feature requires that you be logged into your Samsung account prior to upload Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet e Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Intenet based email Contacts 107 e Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message e Wi Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi Fi Direct enabled device Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a recipient For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 95 1 From the Home screen tap Ey 2 Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth Important You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature 4 Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient 108 Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your phone s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap Lf 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SIM card 3 Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries
198. een or Home and lock screens Buddy photo share allows you to share the current image with active ChatON buddies Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a counterclockwise direction Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the current picture Tap Done to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Cancel to ignore any changes Detect text launches the Photo Reader application that can then detect text within the new photo Scan for nearby devices scans for nearby DLNA compliant devices that can receive or display the current image Details files details such as Title Time Width Height Orientation File Size and Path Settings provides access to the Gallery options menu Choose from SNS data management Cloud sync and Tags Video viewing options Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 1 Tap a video to select it 2 Tap to play the video e Share via Si allows you to share the video via ChatON Bluetooth Dropbox Email Gmail Google Messaging Picassa Wi Fi Direct or YouTube Multimedia 157 e Trim E3 activates the Trim feature so that you can edit the length of the current video e Delete T allows you to delete the current video Choose e
199. efault is Spanish 2 Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination language that you would like to translate to Default is English US 3 Enter text into the top box and it will automatically be translated into the lower box Applications and Development 231 4 Tap the selected Translate button within the bottom field The top target language field is then updated with the new translation To translate using your voice Important The two on screen buttons at the bottom of the 1 232 application correspond to the two currently selected languages At the S Translator screen tap the left voice button to verbally speak the selected language corresponds to top field Wait a few seconds until the on screen notification shows Speak in then speak using the selected language Within a few seconds confirm the translated text now appears in the other translation field 4 Tap the selected _ Speak button to translate using your selected input language and voice Example if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish translation tap the Speak English US button and wait for the text to appear on screen 5 Press for additional options Choose from History Favorite Preset phrases TTS speech rate and Help S Voice Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Te
200. eld 3 Select a language by tapping Choose input languages area 4 Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages 5 Select the desired languages 6 Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A blue check mark indicates the feature is active 7 Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a network you can still use the service Changing Your Settings 305 Samsung Keyboard Settings 1 306 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt o adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods drag across the icons and select Fey Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen Set any of the following options e Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard configuration Qwerty keyboard default or 3x4 keyboard e Input language sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language e Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and hold to access the advanced settings e SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe allows you to enter text by sliding your fingers across the on screen keyboard
201. emain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current location may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To mak
202. emos you have written Note Different folders may appear depending on how your phone is configured 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application Navigation Google Maps Navigation Beta is an internet connected turn by turn GPS navigation system with voice guidance Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries Important To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions inside a building or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather around high voltage or electromagnetic fields in a vehicle with tinted windows 1 From the Home screen tap FE Apps gt Navigation 2 Read the on screen disclaimer regarding the current release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept Enabling Location 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 3 Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 4 Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations Navigation options 1 From the Home screen tap Ad Apps gt A Navigation The navigation application can be configured from the main screen 2 If prompted read the on screen disclaimer an
203. en press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Motions and gestures e Air gesture Allows you to control your device by performing motions above the sensor without touching the device e Motion Allows you to control your device using natural movements on the screen Understanding Your Device 45 e Palm motion Allows you to control your device by touching the screen with your entire hand Gyroscope calibration Allows you to properly calibrate your device s touch screen To activate Air gesture 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider to the right to turn it on If the feature is available for your selected action an Air gesture icon gt will appear in the status bar 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture can be activated 4 Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review on screen information about the Air gestures sensor and related icon 5 Inasingle motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position 46 For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 311 To activate Motion 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At
204. en Power 302 Power Saving Mode 301 Predictive Text Activation 307 Prepend Area Code 297 Primary Shortcuts 42 Adding and Deleting 58 Customizing 58 Replacing 58 Q Quick Dialing 63 Quick Messaging 119 R Recently used Applications Accessing 55 Red Eye Correction 168 Redialing the last number 69 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 338 Reject Call Rejection Messages 293 Reject Calls Managing 66 Reject List Add To 67 Add to 82 83 Adding 103 Auto Reject 67 Removing 103 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 67 Assigning Single Numbers 67 Rejection Messages Set Up 293 Reset 323 Reset App Preferences 329 Reset Device 323 Responsible Listening 351 Restarting Device 19 Restore 319 Restrict Background Data 271 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 356 Ringtone Assigning 294 300 Device 290 Volume 289 rvice 194 S Beam 279 On 163 279 Sharing Multiple Pictures 164 Sharing Pictures 163 S Memo Creating a New Memo 229 S Translator Translate Text 231 Translate Using Voice 232 S Voice 232 Set Wake Up Command 281 Using 80 Samsung Account Backing Up Bookmarks 322 Creating 21 Merge Contacts 102 Samsung Hub Creating a New Account 173 Using 173 Samsung Keyboard 90 ABC Mode 92 Changing the Input Type 91 Enabling 90 Entering Symbols 93 Handwriting Settings 306 Predictive Text Settings 307 Reset Settings 307 Settings 306 Symbol Numeric Mode 93 Samsung Link Configur
205. en source licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING M919_UM_English_MDD_050913_F5 THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS Modification of Software SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING CUSTOM OP
206. ence anasto ER bento ete oes 209 Flipboard Se kkah Sag ey eee pee ee ek ed 210 Gale eene ee oe aa e a E 210 GMail as cccnavan sean aden parait 210 GOOD Octo cue dette det eret ie 211 GOJE F cin hoe ne es Se eegaader cs sce 211 GOUD Play gsncae ceeetiras tonora 211 mea A E E TEE 213 E EPE E v abe ois tebe os 213 Local sesana na E a ereeed es 214 Lookout Security 214 Maps sca eae eg anaE AAE E tae 215 Messaging 2eeeee eee eee 218 Messenger 2eeeeeeeeeee 218 Mobile HotSpot 218 MUSIC ouse ides inate A i enee aces 218 My FiOS esac 540 24 eed heria eee ee 219 Navigation recni beet dee Gees eed ees 221 Optical Reader 0 0ccce cee eeee 223 4 PRONG oe redenn aa dat 223 Play BOOKS nins miana 223 Play Magazines 04 224 Play Movies amp TV seakan a ia 224 Play MUSIC e scscace ciel meren 225 Play STONE o nins panan a E 225 Downloading a New Google Application 225 Launching an Installed Google Application 227 POLARIS Office 5 tainn 228 SHOaln 2 sc teanddie cae reel dite dbo de eens 229 SO MOM Oban c2 6 5 5 gea oe aE aca 229 S TWANSIAOM ceria eunea a 231 D VOICE iaioe a EERE 232 Samsung AppS 000ee 233 Samsung Hub 20000ee eee 233 Samsung Link 00000 ee 234 SENGS oaa EEEE E 235 Story Album n on annann 236 T Mobile My Account 236 T Mobile Name ID
207. enu 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels e Music video games and other media Ringtone Notifications or System 3 Tap OK to assign the volume levels Vibration intensity Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is for different options 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound gt Vibration intensity 2 Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for Incoming call Notification and Haptic feedback 3 Tap OK to assign the vibration levels Changing Your Settings 289 Setup the Ringtones This option allows you to set the ringtone 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound 2 Tap Ringtones 3 Tap a ringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 4 Tap Add to locate a compatible media file that can be used as a ringtone 5 Tap OK to assign a ringer Setup the Vibration This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound 2 Tap Vibrations 3 Select a vibration pattern and tap OK or Tap Create to then use an on screen touch circle to create your own custom vibration pattern Tap Save to store the new vibration pattern 290 Notifications This option allows you to set the ringtone tha
208. equire a fast connection using the standard 3G 2G network speed follow these instructions to connect to these network types 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM WCDMA auto connect A selection indicator displays next to this option to show that it is active This is the default mode for this device 274 Using the 2G GSM Only Network If you are not using applications that require a faster network speed any application that accesses the network or uses a browser using the 2G only WCDMA network saves battery life 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Using the WCDMA 3G Only Network This option uses a 3G connection only 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap WCDMA only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Connecting to 3G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection You can also scan and select a network operator manually or set the network selection to Automatic 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt M
209. er 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot 3 Press i and then tap Change order 4 Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial location Note Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to switch positions 5 Tap Done to store the change 6 Press 5 to return to the previous screen 70 Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1 From the Home screen tap gt Keypad tab 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting 3 Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location and select Remove from the context menu or Press and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select x Remove entry Select either Done to complete the deletion or Cancel to exit 4 Press gt to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing 1 From the Home screen tap Ww 2 Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location numbers 2 100 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial 3 If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap gt gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new SIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular covera
210. er to Changing Your Settings on page 263 Applications and Development 235 Story Album With Story Album you can create a digital Album of your story in media Special moments will be on a timeline and if you wish you can have your album published as a hard copy 1 on the Home screen tap Ef Apps gt Story Album Read the introductory information and tap Next Tap Start to begin your Story Album Follow the on screen instructions Press and then tap Help for additional information ary 236 T Mobile My Account This application provides you online access to account information such as your current activity billing information service plans downloads and other information Note Wi Fi connection must be disabled prior to use this application requires use of a T Mobile network connection 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt T Mobile My Account 2 If prompted follow the on screen information for what s new in the app Note Some features may require you to log into your account 3 The application screen provides several available options e Account Info provides access to account specific features such as Notifications e Device Support provides details about your current billing summary e Notifications provides about both your current plan other available plans and other related services e MobileLife FamilyWhere provides links to other T Mobile related informati
211. ere you can better organize and group desired apps e Uninstall allows you to uninstall a user downloaded application Only those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded Tap to remove the selected app e Downloaded applications allows you to filter the view of apps to only those applications that you have downloaded e View type allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is shown page 58 e Share apps allows you to share information about selected applications with external users page 56 e Hide applications allows you to specify which current applications are hidden from view in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done e Show hidden applications allows you to specify which previously hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done Press to return to the Home screen Understanding Your Device 43 Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions Press and hold Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item For example press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu
212. ered in lowercase Pressing this while in 123SYM mode reveals additional numeric symbols keys gt Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase gt All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters ES By default the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following letters are lower case After a word is entered and you lift your finger the cursor automatically adds a space after the word Note If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry an on screen popup appears to provide additional word choices Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE By using the on screen keyboard in portrait mode some symbols are not available such as Emoticons or Smileys In SYM mode using Swype you can only enter symbols and numbers from the on screen keyboard Once in SYM mode the text mode key shows H 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap E to configure the keyboard for SYM mode Once in this mode the text input type shows H 3 Tap the on screen key for the number or symbol you want to enter 4 Tap to select from additional symbols For example e To enter tap gt and select the key Entering Text 89 Using the Samsung Keyboard This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or lands
213. ersonal dictionary with commonly used words or names from your available accounts e Edit Dictionary allows you to edit your current personal Swype dictionary e Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account from where contact names are added to your Swype s personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text fields Helps recognize familiar names e Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account from where names and words are added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names and words e Gmail allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names Tap Updates to update the application if new software is available Changing Your Settings 309 Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input 2 Tap Voice search to configure the following e Language choose a language for your voice input Speech output Sets whether you will use speech output always or only when using hands free e Block offensive words enable or disable blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice input Google searches e Hotword detection enable to being able to launch voice search by saying the word Google e Downl
214. es access to the Bookmarks screen or From the home page press 1 to access the following options o e Homepage displays the home Web page e New window launches a new browser window By default this screen shows the home page e Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list e Add shortcut allows you to add a shortcut to your Home screen Save page allows you to store the current page in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection It is saved in your Saved pages folder e Share via allows you to share the page using Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Google Messaging S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Find on page allows you to search in the current page e Incognito mode pages viewed in incognito mode won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device For more information refer to Going Incognito on page 245 e Saved pages contains web pages you have saved using the Save page option e History provides access to your History screen e Desktop view allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a Desktop computer e Brightness allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the browser window This is independent of the brightness assigned within the device s Settings
215. ese security policies could restrict some functions from corporate serve Security policy list lists Servers These policies could restrict some fu e Incoming settings Lets yo Port and IMAP path prefix u specify such as User name Password IMAP server Security type S t email s security policy ctions from corporate incoming email settings e Outgoing settings Lets you specify outgoing email settings such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password Note Some the above options may not be displayed when using some Internet account types Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your phone also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap FE gt oO Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add account _ afe Enter your Email address and Password information e Email address your Outlook work email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive 3 Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated fie
216. essages 119 Dropbox 194 Uploading Picture 209 Dual Camera 154 Relocate 154 Resize 154 Dual View see Dual Camera 154 E Easy Mode 292 EDGE Network 274 Edit Page 56 Editing a Picture 167 Email 131 Changing Signature 135 140 Composing 134 Configuring Settings 135 Creating an Internet Account 132 Internet Email 132 Opening 133 Refreshing Messages 134 Sending 112 Wi Fi Download of Attachments 136 141 Emergency Alert Preview 128 Alerts 128 Emergency Alert Configuration 128 Emergency Alerts 128 AMBER 128 Imminent Extreme 128 Message Settings 128 Severe 128 Emergency Calls 349 Making 64 With SIM 64 Without SIM 64 Emoticons 120 Ending Acall 63 Entering Text 85 Using SWYPE 86 Erasing Files Memory Card 331 Exchange Email 137 Account Setup 137 Composing 139 Configuring Settings 140 Deleting Message 140 Opening 139 Refreshing Messages 139 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 335 Extra Volume 74 377 Extreme Alert Disable 129 F Face Unlock 282 283 Facebook Personalize 307 Predictive Text 307 Swpe Connect 309 Facial Recognition 282 Factory Data Reset 323 Prior To 319 Favorites Tab 116 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 355 FCC Notice and Cautions 357 Fixed Dialing Numbers 298 Flipboard 210 Folder Create 42 Font Size 287 Style 287 378 Font Size Caption 240 Changing 303 Forgot Pattern 285 G Gallery Folder Options 164 Opening 169 Picture In Picture 170
217. evice Pull them apart Verify the image is visible in the preview window on the source device providing the file Place them together again 8 From the Touch to beam screen tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer After a few seconds depending on file size the recipient with then see the transferred file displayed on their screen Multimedia 163 To share multiple pictures via S Beam 1 164 On the source device containing the desired image or video tap Apps gt KK Gallery Locate the selected folder Touch and hold the first image and place a check mark on it and all desired images Place the two active NFC enabled devices back to back to begin From the Touch to beam screen tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer When prompted separate the two devices Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 From the Home screen tap Ey Apps gt KK Gallery Select a folder location ex Camera and tap an image to open it or Touch and hold an image to place a box around the file and select multiple files or Tap the upper right camera to begin taking pictures that are placed in this folder or Tap the on screen image to use additional image menu options For more information refer to Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options on page 156 Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target Device Im
218. explode UL Certified Travel Charger The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS dropped or if it receives significant impact Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET Health and Safety Information 347 WARRANTY DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A TOUCH SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty GPS amp AGPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defens
219. f these applications Since Samsung has no control over such applications you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with you It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to you and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and services You agree that Samsung shall not be Warranty Information 367 responsible or liable directly or indirectly for any damage or loss including but not limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third party application is governed by such third party applica
220. f this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System EFS Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Warranty Information 363 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 9012 Samsung Telecommunica
221. f you make a mistake tap KJ once to delete a single digit or Touch and hold Tap a to delete all digits Call Functions and Contacts List 67 Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second pause This is indicated in the number string as a comma 1 From the Home screen tap ro and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses 4 Tap KE 68 Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon Note Do not add multiple Waits to a number string as this will continue to prompt you after each sequence 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press l and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the nex
222. field and select WPA2 PSK 4 With security enabled delete the previous password and enter a new one into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings Connections 261 To mange connected devices This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your device This is similar to a VIP list where only device on the list are allowed access 1 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap Mobile HotSpot gt Allowed devices 3 Tap Add new device to add devices to the allowed for connection list Enter the Device name and Mac address 5 Tap OK to save the new device 262 Section 10 Changing Your Settings This section explains the device settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your device Accessing the Settings Tabs m From the Home screen tap EEE Apps gt Settings or Press gt r and then tap Settings The four available tabs are then displayed The previous Settings list is now broken down into four available tabs described below Settings Tabs Overview The Settings are divided into 4 main groups When the Settings screen displays the following 4 tabs are located at the top of the sc
223. g page displays an main access for all available categories and recently available content for purchase or rental Multimedia 173 2 Scroll across the screen to select from the following 4 Depending on the content you can either purchase available pages rent or stream the content directly from the product MUSIC displays featured Music content available for purchase detail page stream from the Music store amp Radio This page also allows you 5 Choose a payment method then follow the on screen to search for new content or navigate directly to the Music instructions store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the Samsung Hub Notices page Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after e VIDEO displays featured film and TV content available for you create an account in Samsung Hub purchase rentirom INe video store This page also amas you e Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed to search for new content or aga e direc y to the Movie amp concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Samsung Hub or the TV store page by clicking the Video link a the top of the page service that are also registered to the same account e BOOKS displays featured Book content available for purchase You may remove a device from your account no more than once from the Book store This page also allows you to search for every 90 days new content or navigate directly to the B
224. g the information using a PIN code When enabled your phone will ask for a PIN number each time you use the phone Using this option you can also change your SIM PIN number 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN 1 Tap Change SIM PIN 2 Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK 3 Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Changing Your Settings 325 4 Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an asterisk 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security 2 Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts 326 Unknown Sources Before you can
225. ge is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following e Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current in home coverage experience e Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi Fi signal available Important A new micro SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Note This feature is active by default If you are in an active Wi Fi call and go out of range of your Wi Fi the call will be dropped Activating Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt WASA Connections tab 2 Locate the Wi Fi field and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Select a Wi Fi network from the list of available networks Follow the on screen instructions to complete connection o Wi Fi Connected Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP a Wi Fi Communication Issue 7 Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off Call Functions and Contacts List 71
226. ge tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture 1 Note To select the picture area touch and hold the current picture From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt KK Gallery Select a folder location and tap a file to open it With the image displayed press and then tap Edit e Edit allows you to edit the current image Launches the Photo Editor application nae vfr Select an image area by touching and holding the image and then selecting an available option e Selection mode provides several on screen selection options such as Select area Inverse selection Selection size and Selection mode Select area Inverse selection Selection size and Selection mode e Select all select the entire area of the current image e Clipboard copies the currently selected are to your device s clipboard Use the following editor controls to edit your picture Previous move to previous photo project Next move to next photo project Cancel Delete exits the current photo editing session Save stores the curerntly edited photo Rotate allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directions You can also mirror image a photo Multimedia 167 0 E K E Crop allows you to crop cut out an area of a photo Color allows you to Auto adjust color Brightness Contrast Saturation Adjust RGB Temperature Exposure and Hue of a photo Effec
227. glasses and bearded or clean shaven Follow the on screen instructions Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face unlock feature This will increase the security of the feature Lock automatically locks the screen 5 seconds after the screen tums off e Lock instantly with power key once enabled instantly locks the screen after pressing the power key Using Face and Voice Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Face and voice Read the on screen notification and tap Next From the About Face Unlock screen tap Set it up gt Continue Follow the on screen instructions Once prompted to speak and unlock command tap and repeat the phrase four times Once complete tap Done Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the User visible pattern field you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock If you forget your pattern you can regai
228. gn specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Caution Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause spoken by the device Choose from Very slow Slow Normal Fast and Very fast e Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated Configuring the Mouse TrackPad This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a connected mouse or trackpad 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt Pointer speed 2 Adjust the slider and tap OK unintended results To learn how to properly control motions tap EA Apps gt Settings gt My device tab gt Motions and gestures When tapped each entry comes with an on screen tutorial e Air gesture Allows you to control your device by performing motions above the sensor without touching the device e Motion Allows you to control your device using natural movements on the screen e Palm motion Allows you to control your device by touching the screen with your entire hand e Gyroscope calibration Allows you to properly calibrate your device s touch screen Changing Your Settings 311 To activate Air gesture 1 From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider to the right to turn it on
229. haring files images and videos from your device To upload an image on your device to Web storage 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt EE Gallery Select a folder location ex Camera and open an image by tapping it once This opens the image in the preview window Note To select multiple images touch and hold an image to place a colored border around the selected images 3 Select the remote storage location ex Dropbox 4 Select the target folder location and select Upload The device then confirms the available storage locations and begin the process of uploading the selected images To upload a video on your device to Web storage 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Pd Gallery 2 Select a folder location ex Camera and touch and hold a video to place a colored border around the selected file 3 Tap gt Dropbox from the top of the Gallery screen The device then confirms the available storage locations and begin the process of uploading the selected video Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device Important Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Launch AllShare Play Samsung Link on the target device such as an Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung Link Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature 3 Tap your device name from the Registered de
230. he Status bar page 38 e Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication coverage Bluetooth 4G 3G Wi Fi communication battery levels GPS etc Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the five Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square Up to seven 7 total screens are available Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap u Voice Actions to launch the function from within this Google widget Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens Home or extended e Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Contacts Phone Email Play Store etc These function the same as shortcuts
231. he music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays a 1 From within the Music application press 1 gt Settings E 2 Select one of the following settings e SoundAlive set a type of equalization such as Normal Pop Rock Jazz Dance Classic etc e Adapt Sound enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to adjust to the sound levels of your current environment e Play speed set the play speed anywhere between 0 5X and 2 0X using the slider e Music menu this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display Choices are Albums Artists Genres Music square Folders Composers Years Most played Recently played or Recently added Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu e Music auto off when enabled sets a timer for the Music application to automatically turn off after a pre selected amount of time e Lyrics when activated the lyrics of the song are displayed if available e Smart volume when activated automatically adjusts each track s volume to an equal level e Voice control when activated allows you to use voice control commands to control the music player Multimedia 189 Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Pla
232. he S Translator feature e Translate launches a Translate popup menu Here you can both assign the sender s original language and assign a target language for the recipient they will receive your message in the designated language Enable the translate feature then configure the available options as desired Tap OK to store the new settings Adding attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message tap 2 Attach and select one of the following options e Images allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message e Take a picture allows you to temporarily exit the message take a photo with phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save e Video allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list then add it to your message Record video allows you to temporarily exit the message record a video clip using the phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save Messages 121 e Audio allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green then tapping Done Record audio allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an audio clip using the phone s microphone It is then automatically attached to the message S Memo allows you to add an S Memo that you have created Calendar allows you to add an even
233. held away from the head in the user s hand or in approved body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers
234. here you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select z Select input method gt Google voice typing The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to speech 2 Speak into the device s microphone and watch your text being entered on screen 3 Ifthe text is incorrect tap DELETE 94 Section 5 Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 Sign in to your Google account 2 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Accounts tab and then navigate to the My accounts area or From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab and then navigate to the My accounts area Note The Accounts area lists those accounts that have been added to the device and provides an Add account button to quickly and easily add new ones Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your device s built in memory If existing Google and Corporate email accoun
235. hether or not your message was delivered e Manage SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card e Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system s attempting to deliver them e Input mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose from GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient e Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages e Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming e Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message e MMS alert alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an SMS text to MMS multimedia mode Display e Bubble style allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages B
236. ice for development Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk This menu allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Application manager gt ALL Changing Your Settings 327 Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling Third party Applications Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager 2 Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your desired application 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to uninstall the application 328 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the applica
237. ideos the video file to your Camera folder When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera or folder You can view your videos immediately or view them Tap the Pause key 41 to pause the recording anytime in the Camera folder i gt 8 Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer Be From the Home sereen tap H Apps Van Ee Galery then tap gt Play to playback your video for review a F 2 Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin 9 Press to return to the viewer video playback 3 Tap gt Play to begin video playback Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video indicated by a colored border and display the following video menu context options e Share via FE allows you to share the video via ChatON Bluetooth Dropbox Email Gmail Google Messaging Picassa Wi Fi Direct or YouTube e Delete T allows you to delete the current video Choose either OK or Cancel 0r Multimedia 159 Touch and hold a listed video file to place a checkmark alongside and then press for additional options Slideshow allows you to see your files in a slideshow or access the slideshow settings Copy allows you to create a duplicate of the currently selected file Move allows you to move a selected file to a new location Rename allows you to rename the filename of the currently selected video Details displays video f
238. iew e Progress preview allows you to preview a scene or show elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar while watching a video e Speed dial preview allows you to see the contacts and their speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in your contacts list e Webpage magnifier allows you to see magnified links on webpages when you hover your finger over them e Sound and haptic feedback allows you to play sound and feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items Changing Your Settings 315 Voice control The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice commands to control your device 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Voice control 2 Verify the feature is active by tapping IRONY at the top of your screen to activate Voice control 3 The following options are available Tap an option to create a checkmark and activate the feature e Incoming calls allows you to answer or reject calls using the commands Answer and Reject e ChatON allows you to answer or reject calls using the commands Answer and Reject e Alarm allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the commands Stop and Snooze e Camera allows you to take pictures using the voice commands Smile Cheese Capture or Shoot Music allows you to control your Music player using the voice commands Next Previous Pause Play Volume Up and Volume Down 316 Note If you set the alert type for
239. iew a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order m From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt ye Visual Voicemail For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 238 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Voice Recorder 2 Tap Record to record an audio file 3 Tap m Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list 4 Tap oO Pause to pause the recording of an audio file 5 Tap x Cancel to cancel the recording of an audio file 6 Tap List to display a list of current recordings 7 Tap Recording quality to adjust the recording quality Choose from Normal or High quality recording 8 From the Recorded files page press and then select one of the following e Share via and select a method in which to share this audio file Noise reduction allows you to activate deactivate background Selections are Bluetooth Dropbox Email Gmail Messaging noise suppression or Wi Fi Direct Refer to each specific section depending on Recording volume allows you to assign the ambient noise the method you selected to send this voice recording quality of your current location so the device can better detect e Delete
240. ilable offline Tip You can also copy music directly from your computer to your device 186 2 To make your online music available offline on your device 1 From within the Play Music application change your library view to Albums Artists or playlists Press and then select Choose on device music and tap the album or playlist you want to make available offline A blue pin g indicates that the item is already available offline Darker pins appear next to the items you can make available offline A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much space is available on your device for music and other files Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied directly from a computer to your device Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make available offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it available offline You can switch to other views of your library to make other kinds of items available offline as well Tap Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen 5 The Music application starts downloading the items to your device Music The Music Player is an application that can play music files The music player supports files with extensions AAC AAC eAAC MP3 WMA 3GP MP4 and M4A Launching the Music Player allows you to navigate through your music library play songs and create playlists music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps
241. ile information With the video displayed on screen but not playing press I for additional options Favorite tags the current video as a favorite file Rename allows you to rename the filename of the currently selected video Details displays video file information Settings provide access to the Galley settings page From this page you can configure the SNS data management and Tag options 160 Sharing Pictures Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment but an even better treat is to share them with others Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using email or messaging Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a group of users The best example for this feature is having multiple users instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering As each person takes a separate picture with their own device they are all pooled together and instantly appear in each user s Gallery No more Email your pictures to me later Each person walks out of the event with all the pictures taken by everyone This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi Fi Direct active and be paired prior to use Note You can only share a shot with other external users who also have their Wi Fi Direct feature active S Beam Transfer uses the NFC near Fiel
242. in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you choose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you stop it even when you switch applications Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar or In a single motion touch and drag Music notification icon down from the Status bar and tap the song title from the Notifications area You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in the panel For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 38 Tab Options There are various options available from the various tabs 1 From within the Play Music application select one of the following tabs and tap P to access an available option e PLAYLISTS Play Add to queue Rename Delete or Keep on device e RECENT to display the most recently played songs and albums e ARTISTS Play Add to queue Add to playlist or Shop for artist Multimedia 183 e ALBUMS Play Add to queue Add to playlist More by artist or Shop for artist e SONGS Play Add to queue Add to playlist Shop for artist or Delete e GENRES Play Add to queue Add to playlist More by artist or Shop for artist Options While Playing a Song When you play
243. ination until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt Camera 2 Press and then tap Settings gt Fey Settings and scroll up to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Device or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press to return to the Home screen Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Play Store etc An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as Media Hub Note The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt JEW Accounts tab 2 Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add account gt Samsung account 3 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in or If this is your first time tap Create new account Getting Started 21 Enter your the required information and tap Sign up 5 Tap Terms and conditions Special terms and Privacy policy to read the legal disclaimers and related information
244. ing Settings 193 Definitions 234 Deregister Storage 194 Sharing Files 194 Sharing Media 195 Uploading Images to Web 194 Uploading Video to Web 195 Web Storage Setup 193 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 345 Save a Number From Keypad 97 Scan for Nearby Devices 189 Screen Home 40 Navigation 44 Screen Capture 314 Taking a Screen Shot 165 Screen Lock Set Up 283 Sounds 291 385 Screen Lock Pattern Changing 284 Creating 283 Deleting 284 Forgot My Pattern 285 Screen Mirroring Activate on Device 197 Activation 280 On 197 Using AllShare Cast Hub 197 Screen Mirroringt On 280 Screen Rotation Auto Rotate 287 Screen Timeout 287 Screen Unlock Face and Voice Unlock 283 Face Unlock 282 Swipe 282 Screens Adding and Deleting 56 Customizing 55 Rearranging 56 386 SD card Mounting the 331 Unmounting 331 Sending a Namecard 107 Setting an alarm 203 Setting up Share Applications 56 Share Shot 161 Activate 153 Configuring 162 Enabling 162 Stop Sharing 162 Voicemail 22 Settings 154 263 Accessing 263 Browser 248 Call 65 Contact list 113 Display 32 Enabling the GPS Satellites 324 Enabling Wireless Locations 324 Messaging 126 Tab Overview 263 Wallpaper 60 61 Setup Initial 16 Severe Alert Disable 129 Taking Images 162 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 57 Adding from Home Screen 57 Deleting from a Screen 58 Managing 57 Primary 42 SIM Micro 7 10 see also micro SIM 10 Sky
245. ing tone 2 Power End key ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states turn the device on or off or Restart Understanding Your Device 31 Device Display Your display provides information about the device s status and is the interface to manage features The display indicates your connection status signal strength battery status and time Icons display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set The screen also displays notifications and Application or shortcut bar with five primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging Internet and Apps Display settings In this menu you can change various settings for the for the wallpaper cube brightness or backlight m From the Home screen tap Eg Apps gt Settings gt AE My device tab gt Display For more information refer to Display Settings on page 286 32 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength phone battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your phone s display screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see on your device s display and Indicator area Note Some Notification icons can be hidden man
246. ion and tap OK to continue 3 Follow the on screen tutorials Applications and Development 211 Creating a group If you users have media you want to share create a group for other to join to and then share collaborate with what you are sharing The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the shared file All other joined members can then interact with the file being shared 1 212 Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your other participants are also connected to this same Wi Fi From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt K Group Play Tap the Set group password field to enable the function which requires users to enter a password prior to connecting to your new group Tap Create group If previously selected enter your group password and tap OK Mobile AP is enabled Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and play content heading Tap to select the items you want to share indicated by a checkmark then tap Done or OK 7 Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their devices see below and they can view your media using you as a Mobile AP Joining a group A joiner is the participant of an already created group You can only view and interact with media shared by the leader of an existing group 1 Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your connection is this same Wi Fi as the group leader From the Home screen tap Apps gt E Group
247. ion to Activate You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 296 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress 1 In a single motion touch OR and slide it in any direction to answer the new incoming call 2 Tap an option from the Accept call after menu e Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call e Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back Call Functions and Contacts List 79 Using S Voice This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of functions on your device This is a natural language recognition application This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms You can ask it questions Is it raining in Dallas or give it commands Show my where to find cheap gas 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt S Voice 2 Read the on screen disclaimer information and tap Confirm to continue
248. is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the Web m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt CM Gmail For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 142 Google Use Google Search to search the Web m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Google and enter the search text or Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google m From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt Google For more information refer to Google on page 147 Group Play This application lets you share documents photos or music in real time with other connected friends Note Group play is not the same as Screen mirroring which requires a connection to a Wi Fi capable Samsung TV or via the use of the AllShare Cast Hub For more information refer to Al Share Cast Hub on page 196 Important To share a Group Play all users must be connected to the same Wi Fi access point 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt fs Group Play 2 Read the various on screen informat
249. ist ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked 124 To access additional Bubble options Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options e Delete message deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Copy message text copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Lock Unlock message locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an external recipient e Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble e Translate translates the text from the currently selected bubble into a desired language Deleting Messages Deleting a single message thread 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete thread 3 At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message threads 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 Press r and then tap Delete threads 3 Tap each message thread you want to delete A check mark displays beside each selected message 4 Tap Delete 5 At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process Deleting a single message bubble 1 From the Home screen tap v
250. ith my moved are now listed under the Samsung account Google Account field heading in your Bookmark list 5 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab gt 322 Backup and reset 6 Tap Back up my data to create a checkmark This will back up your app data Wi Fi passwords and other settings 7 Your Google account should be listed under the Backup option If not Tap Backup account gt Add account and sign into your Google account 8 Tap the checkbox next to Automatic restore to create a checkmark This will restore the settings that were backed up when you re install an application Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab gt Backup and reset gt Factory data reset 2 Read the on screen reset information 3 Tap Reset device 4 If necessary enter your password and tap Delete all The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home screen Collect Diagnostics This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use 1 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics 2 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 3 Choose to en
251. ither OK or Cancel 3 Press for additional options Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you Note The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed 158 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Camera to activate the camera mode 2 Using the camera s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject 3 Before you take a video use the Volume control buttons to zoom in or out You can magnify the video up to x4 400 percent Note Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread pinch the screen to zoom in or out For more information refer to Navigating Through the Screens on page 44 4 Tap the Video key to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording 5 Tap anywhere on the screen to re focus the camera on that object The camcorder auto focuses on the new target area 6 To capture an image from the video while recording tap This feature is not available while the anti shake feature is activated 7 Tap the Stop key w to stop the recording and save Accessing V
252. ive Colors 303 Network connection Adding a new 257 Network Mode 2G Network 274 GSM WCDMA 274 LTE 274 New applications Downloading 225 NFC Near Field Communication 278 Noise Reduction 75 Non Market Applications 227 Notification Vibration Setting 289 Notification Bar 38 Using 38 Notifications Volume 289 0 On Off Switch 18 Operating Environment 353 Optical Reader 91 223 Organizer Calculator 199 World Clock 205 Other Important Safety Information 357 Out of Office Message 141 Settings 141 Outlook 131 Overview Home Screen 40 P Palm Motion Activate 47 313 Capture Screen 314 Mute Pause 314 On 47 165 313 Passpoint On 265 Passwords Make Visible 326 Pause Adding to a Contact 101 Pause Dialing 68 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 342 Personalize Call Sound 74 Phone Icons 32 Switching on off 18 383 Phone number Finding 62 Phone Ringtone 290 Phone Vibration 290 Photo Editing 167 Photo Reader Detect Text 157 Photos Options 156 157 159 Sharing 156 157 159 Picture Color Correction 168 Face Corrections 168 Frame 168 Set As 166 Streaming from Gallery 165 Picture In Picture 170 Pictures Instant Sharing 161 Sharing 160 163 384 Play Books 223 Play Music 225 Play Store 225 Quick Access 43 Pointer Speed Configuration 311 Power Auto Adjust Screen Tone 287 Power Saving CPU Power 301 Haptic Feedback 302 LCD Adjustment 287 Learning About 302 Scre
253. ject list provides access to current rejection entries and numbers e Set up call rejection messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones e Answering ending calls allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls The home key answers calls allows you to press to answer the phone Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using voice The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call e Turn off screen during calls allows you to force the screen to tum off during an active call e Call alerts allows you to assign call alert tones and activate Call alerts and vibration Call vibrations vibrates the phone when the called party answers Choose from Answer vibration or Call end vibration Call status tones assigns sounds settings during the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on calls selects whether alarm and message notification is tumed off during a call e Call accessories al incoming calls lows you to assig Automatic answering configures ti answer and incomi Automatic answering timer con the device automa Outgoing call conditions configu ically accepts the device to make ot tbound calls within n headset settings during he device to automatically ing call when a headset is detected figures the time delay before
254. k the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Note For additional information on WPS Connections refer to WPS Push Button on page 267 and WPS PIN Entry on page 268 256 Activating Wi Fi By default your device s Wi Fi feature is turned off deactivated Activating Wi Fi allows your device to discover and connect to compatible in range WAPs Wireless Access Points _ 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt JI Connections tab 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Wi Fi The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section 2 Tap the network you wish to connect to Note When you select an open network you are automatically connected 3 Enter a wireless password if necessary Manually Add a New Network Connection 4 Tap Connect 1 From the Wi Fi network screen tap Add Wi Fi network Wi Fi Status Indicators 2 Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status Access Point es Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and 3 Tap the Security field and select a s
255. k of the device beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the device and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license 17 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect 050113 Warranty Information 371 Index Numerics 2G Network Using Only 274 2 Sec Pause Adding 65 A ABC 87 Accessing Recently used applications 55 Voice mail 23 Accessory 302 Audio Output 302 Dock Sound 302 Accounts and Sync Adding Contacts 111 Add 2 Sec Pause 68 101 Add to Favorites 116 Adjusting Call volume 74 372 Adobe PDF 228 Air Call Accept 66 Air Gesture Acti
256. kground Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Note The larger the number of applications running on your phone the larger the energy drain on your battery Task Manger Overview Shutting Down an Currently Active Application m Press and hold Home and then tap iS m Press and hold Home and then tap x Task manager This screen contains the following End all tabs ior e Active applications display those currently active applications 1 Press and hold Home and then tap iS running on your phone Task manager e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications 2 From the Active applications tab tap End to close from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap selected applications Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM which displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage and external SD card Tap End all to close all background running applications Getting Sta
257. l e Delete allows you to delete the S Memo e Export allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either an Image file or PDF file Save as allows you to save the memo with a different name e Add tag allows you to set tags to add in searches e Add as favorite allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite e Change background allows you to set the background for your memo Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a background and then tap Done e Edit pages allows you to edit existing memo pages e Create event allows you to link the memo to your Calendar events e Set as allows you to set a memo as a Contact icon Home screen wallpaper Lock screen wallpaper or Home and lock screens e Print allows you to print the screen or Web page on a Samsung printer using Wi Fi When you are finished creating your memo tap Save on the top menu bar S Translator Allows you can easily translate words and phrases verbal or text messages into many different languages Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt a S Translator 2 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to log into your Samsung account To translate text 1 Atthe S Translator screen tap the top language bar to select your target source language D
258. l not be combined or consolidated with any other person s or entity s claim or dispute and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class Warranty Information 369 action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant Samsung its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fee
259. last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Effects Downloads provides access to pre installed and downloaded effects Default effects include No effect Vignette Grey scale Sepia Vintage Faded color Turquoise Tint Cartoon Moody Rugged Oil pastel and Fisheye N Camcorder button shoots a video when pressed V Camera button takes a photo when pressed in a Camera mode 4 Mode button allows you to select from different camera modes m Storage location Connection Status indicates the t device is connected to an adapter and the current storage location for images Phone or Memory card on the device Quick Settings Tap at the top of the display to quickly change Camera settings Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes The available options vary by mode yt Camera settings configure Camera settings 40 Flash activate or deactivate the flash o Night detection use this activate deactivate night FF detection Q Voice control activate or deactivate the voice control OFF to take photos QM Recording mode select a resolution for videos Choose from Normal Limit for MMS Slow motion or Fast motion Share functions activate or deactivate the sharing options Choose from Off Share Shot Buddy photo share ChatON phot share or Remote viewfinder Multimedia 153 gt Share shot Shooting mode lists
260. laying within the Music application Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Play Music application Displays when your device s GPS is on and communicating Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the microSD card has been improperly removed or unexpectedly Displays when storage within either the internal location or the external SD card has reached its capacity It is recommended you either move files off or delete them to make additional room Understanding Your Device 37 Es Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to view your current battery level Displays when TTY device has been inserted TTY For more details on configuring your phone s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 263 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages calendar events call status etc You can expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 Touch the Status bar to
261. ld 4 Tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails Note If selected the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If activated skip to step 6 5 Tap Next Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support 6 Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync from the add new email account screen Note If prompted with an on screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish tap Edit details to continue with a manual update of necessary information 7 When prompted to provide additional detailed information within the Exchange server settings screen enter an updated Domain and confirm your user name and Password information Messages 137 Important Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the Domain user name entry Most servers only provide a username 8 Update or re enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information provided by your server Exchange Server your exchange server remote email address Typically starts with mail XXX com Obtain this information from your company network administrator Important Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information e If your network requires SSL encryption tap the
262. least one feature must be activated before Motion can be activated 4 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 311 To activate Palm Motion Gyroscope Calibration 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Calibrate your device by using the built in gyroscope Motions and gestures 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Palm motion Motions and gestures gt Gyroscope calibration slider to the right to turn it on 2 Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK The device adjusts the level of the accelerometer During the calibration process a green circle appears on screen and the center circle adjusts to the center position Note At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated 4 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 311 Understanding Your Device 47 Using the Multi Window This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the current screen at the same time Note Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be active atop another current application on the screen When launching applications that contain multimedia fi
263. lerts e Alerts issued by the President e Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life e AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled To disable Extreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 Press j and then tap Settings 3 Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts All alerts are enabled by default check mark showing 4 Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the check mark Assigning Messages as Spam You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a key term or phrase Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Touch and hold a message from a phone number 3 Select Add to spam numbers and tap OK To assign a phone number manually as spam 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option e Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings such as 4 Tap Add to spam numbers gt Add e This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Messages 129 5 Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number or Tap 2 to select from either your exi
264. les music video audio from both files will be played simultaneously Activating and Deactivating Multi window To activate Multi window via the Notification screen 1 48 In a single motion touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag it to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen 1 From the Notification screen tap Open Grid view to display additional functions 3 Tap the MultiWindow entry to activate the feature 2 The icon turns green when active Note Although the MultiWindow feature is now active as shown via the Notifications screen the user must enable display the MultiWindow list is shown only by using the Back button This action is a one time event during the initial access After that the MultiWindow list is displayed whenever the feature in active via the Notifications screen 2 To display the Multi window tab 1 Press and hold the Back key S The Multi window tab appears by default on the left side of the screen Note Initially open activation the entire apps panel is briefly displayed then minimized to only show the tab 2 Tap the tab to open the application panel showing all the available Multi window apps To hide the Multi window tab m Press and hold the Back key S This action hides the Multi window tab from view Repositioning the Multi Window The Multi window contains two components tab and apps panel The tab can
265. less equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft e Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender or legal action or both e While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately 358 Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician e If your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 Section 1
266. lete threads allows you to delete any message thread Select the messages to delete and a green check mark will appear next to the message Tap Delete For more information refer to Deleting a single message thread on page 125 e Draft messages displays the draft messages folder and its contents e Locked messages displays the locked messages folder and its contents e Scheduled messages displays the scheduled messages folder and its contents Spam messages displays the spam messages folder and its contents e Text templates displays your available text message reply templates For more information refer to Text Templates on page 131 e Settings allows you to access Messaging settings For more information refer to Messaging Settings on page 126 Messages 119 120 From the Messaging screen list touch and hold an on screen message and select an option e Add to Contacts allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry e View contact allows you to view the current entry information for the sender e Delete thread deletes the entire message and its bubbles Deleting a single message threadFor more information refer to Deleting a single message bubble on page 125 e Add to spam numbers allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder Options while in a current message 1 2 From the Home screen tap
267. lity Important You must be using an active Wi Fi 4G LTE connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link Chat On and Samsung Hub Creating a New Samsung Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create an account Enter the required information 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap ae Apps gt 3 Samsung Hub 3 When prompted to connect via mobile networks select either Cancel or Connect 4 If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or verified tap OK You must be signed in to your Samsung account to use the application s various features Tip In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your Samsung account via the application Press and then select Sign in Note Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application This application manages your user profile information Using Samsung Hub The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all the available categories on one page such as Music Video Books and Games The overview page also displays recently added media that you can rent or purchase 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ea Samsung Hub e The OVERVIEW screen landin
268. ll Functions and Contacts List 75 Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps 1 Tap Speaker off to toggle the speakerphone on 2 Tap Ee Speaker on to toggle the speakerphone off Tip When the speaker is turned On the color of the speaker is green When the speaker is turned Off the color of the speaker is white Muting a Call 1 Tap Mute off to turn mute on so the other caller cannot hear you speaking J 2 Tap Mute on to turn mute off and resume your conversation 76 Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1 Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call 2 While on a call switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping Q Headset off 3 Atthe prompt tap OK to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated 4 While on a call switch back to the device speaker by tapping cy Headset on More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contacts list or create a Memo Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap Contacts 2 Browse the Contacts list for the information you need 3 Press to return to the active call Creating a Message During a Call During a call you can create a message 1 Press l and then tap Message gt Compose 2
269. location in the list of apps Lift your finger or stylus off the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new location To remove a Multi window application 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps Tap the Edit button located at the bottom of the list to reveal a staging area that can house any removed applications from the Multi window panel 4 Tap Done once you have completed the removal process To restore a Multi window application 1 2 Activate the Multi window feature Tap the tab to display the apps panel containing the scrollable apps Tap the Edit button located at the bottom of the list to reveal the staging area containing any previously removed apps Locate the desired application In a single motion touch and hold a desired app until it detaches from the staging area then carefully drag it to a new location in the current list of apps Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the Same screen Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be run at the same time as a current on screen app Once multiple apps are running on the same screen you can then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a desired app Note Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be active atop another current application on the screen When launching applications that contain multimedia files mu
270. lock your device using your Google account 1 Tap Forgot pattern located at the bottom of the screen 2 Tap the Username email and Password fields use the on screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials and tap Sign in to complete the login process 3 If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials visit the Google website to recover them If you still cannot get your Google Account credentials contact your wireless carrier for additional options Changing Your Settings 285 PIN Lock and Unlock 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt PIN Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password Confirm the PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone Password Lock and Unlock 1 286 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock Tap Password Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Display Settings In this menu you can change various settings for the display such as the font orientation pop up notifications puzzle lock feature animation brightness and screen timeout and power saving mode Adjusting the Screen Display 1 From the Home screen press J 1 and then tap Se
271. me Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain with the current map location Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your map Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share your location with them My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map Press and select one of the following options e Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map e Make available offline allows you to store map related information locally on your device and access it even when the device is offline e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Display allows you to enable disable the Zoom Buttons Scale Bar and Bubble action Offline and cache allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Choose from Automatic caching Clear all map titles or Clear My Places cache Location settings lets you access and configure the locatio settings Sign in allows you to sign into your current Google account 5 Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetim
272. mobile network Note Using your mobile network may result in additional charges depending on your payment plan Applications and Development 233 3 Use your fingers to scroll across the available Samsung Hub screen You can select Combined view Music Video Books and Games Music Video Books or Games 4 Follow the on screen instructions to browse view or purchase media 5 Press I and then tap Help for additional information Samsung Link This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s Samsung Link makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer 234 AllShare Samsung Link Definitions Samsung Link AllShare Play Group Play AllShare Cast with Hub accessory This new feature builds on the previous AllShare Play functionality It includes features such as Web storage integration and social networking integration This is a Web service that requires using a Samsung account A subset feature of Samsung Link this allows you to mirror photos and multimedia presentations with other members of your cur
273. msung Telecommunications America LLC Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device For 24 hour information and assistance we offer a new FAQ ARS System Automated Response System at www samsung com us support Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave Inc Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Google Play Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Google Talk Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance Inc LTE is a trademark of ETSI Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 2010 Swype Inc All rights reserved DIVX DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license DivX Certified
274. n Wi Fi Advanced Settings The Wi Fi settings Advanced menu allows you to set up many of the device s Wi Fi services including Setting the Wi Fi sleep policy e Viewing the device s MAC Address e Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP To access the Wi Fi Advanced Settings menu 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced USB Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads To connect using USB Tethering 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Mobile HotSpot Sor From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt MA Connections tab gt More networks gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your device Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the scree
275. n Look for the Tethering active icon A in the Status bar area of the screen Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK Connections 259 To disconnect tethering 1 From the Home screen tap Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature 3 Remove the USB cable from the device Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi hotspot The feature works best when used in conjunction with 4G LTE data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Apps gt Important The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when device is connected to Wi Fi Please disconnect your Wi Fi connection prior to active this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot 260 To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt gt Mobile HotSpot or a From the Home screen press 1 and then tap Settings gt A gt Connections tab gt More networks gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification regardi
276. n tap EA Apps gt dad Gallery to locate your newly shot images located in their default storage location External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded or RECV received folder Confirm Fo Share shot images delivered received appears in the Notifications area of the screen Using S Beam to Share Pictures This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 2 Important Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying From the main Settings page tap Connections tab If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the NFC slider to the right to turn it on Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on On the source device containing the desired image or video tap Apps gt Dn Gallery Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview window the Lock screen They must both be active and unlocked It is recommended that the target device be on the Home screen 7 Place the two active NFC enabled devices back to back to begin Note If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the source d
277. n SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY S
278. n access to the device by entering a PIN code Note Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Pattern Read the instructions then tap Next Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle Changing Your Settings 283 5 When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue 6 Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set 7 Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue 8 Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and tap OK Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary This process is similar to changing your password from time to time 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section 284 Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock 3 Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Non
279. n and select a photo for this contact Selections are Image Pictures by people Take picture or S Memo Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type 98 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Mobile Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom or Callback Enter additional fields as desired Tap Save to complete and store the new entry Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Note For further details about how to enter characters see Text Input Methods on page 85 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in memory or an external location such as Google Exchange or T Mobile Backup They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity called Contacts Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed or Tap the Search field and begin entering the entry s name Matching entries are then displayed This process filters through all of your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries or
280. n may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your device depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the device s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the device s Settings Getting Started 7 Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart from the rest These are intended to point out important information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts Important Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventio
281. n show additional symbol characters e SWYPE settings Touch and hold this button to access the Swype settings screen e Text Input mode There are two available modes 123ABC and SYM 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common punctuation marks Text mode button indicates SYM SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers Text mode button indicates 123ABC Entering Text 87 Recipients rat 2 Text input field Suggestions eee iy L2 CAPS ALT q wie oy la i mp key Current Mode POTT g h j k iy Ne Delete ae He a SWYPE Settings Text Input mode 88 Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE In 123ABC mode you can enter only letters and a few common punctuation marks from the on screen keyboard The text mode key shows fa 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Edit 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode showing letters and numbers on the on screen keys Once in this mode the text input type shows ee Note After typing an initial uppercase character the key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word Ifyou make a mistake tap Fey to erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Tap EX Send to deliver the message All lowercase Displays when the next character is ent
282. n tap Saved pages o A list of your saved webpages is displayed with their Name The webpages that have been visited the most will appear at the top 2 Tap any entry to display the webpage Connections 247 Browser Settings To configure browser settings 1 248 From the Home screen tap Apps gt nternet Press and then tap Settings Choose an option from the following categories Basics e Set home page Sets the current home page for the Web browser e Auto fill text Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto fill feature Privacy Search and URL suggestions displays predictions of related queries and popular websites in the address bar as you type e Preload available links before opening allows you improve performance when loading pages e Remember form data Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Delete personal data allows you to delete all personal data such as Browsing history Cache Cookies and site data Passwords Auto fill data and Location access Accessibility e Text scaling allows you to preview the text size scale the text size using a slider bar set the zoom amount on double tap and minimize the font size using a slider bar e Force zoom allows you to override the web
283. n the same direct communication mode Displays when Wi Fi Direct is communicating with another compatible device Displays to alert you to disable an active Wi Fi Direct connection if not in use to conserve battery power Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active and communicating For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 259 Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 260 HOB naa 32D Displays when a share shot has been established with other users via a Wi Fi Direct connection Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function Displays in the notifications window when a new T Mobile account information is available Displays in the notifications window when there are too many on screen notification icons to display Tap to show more notifications Tap to select a text input method Dgs M EE ol gt Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently p
284. name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed Connections 245 e Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks e Delete Erases selected bookmarks Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks e Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options e Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window e Edit bookmark Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 246 e Add shortcut Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen e Share link Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Google Messaging S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Delete bookmark Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks on page 247 e Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Adding Bookmarks 1 2 From the webpage tap gt Add bookmark Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL Select a storage location for your new bookmark Update the title of the Bookmark and confirm the URL Tap Save The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you wan
285. nd allows you to video conference Gestures Sensor used to detect Air View and Air Gesture motions 11 Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface of the screen This is typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against the screen such as during a phone call While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses 12 Receiver allows you to hear the other caller Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your Device 1 microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your device External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your phone micro SIM Card Slot internal Installation location for SIM card Gaw MQN dE Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music Camera lens is used to take photos IR Transmitter used to emit infrared signals used for controlling external devices For more information refer to Using WatchON on page 176 Side Views The following illustration shows the side elements of your device cm 4 1 Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode with the phone open or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call e Pressing the volume key down mutes the r
286. nd receive new emails and synchronize your email with the Gmail account Other Gmail Options 1 From the main Gmail screen tap G Labels at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages From the main Gmail screen tap Q Search at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages Composing a Gmail Messa 1 2 3 Tip Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma e From the Home screen tap E gt M Gmail From the Gmail Inbox tap ma Compose at the bottom of the screen to create a new message Enter the recipients Email address in the To field 7 Press r and select Add Cc Bec to add a carbon or blind copy Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your message Once complete tap gt Send Viewing a Gmail Message 1 From the Gmail Inbox tap a message to view the following options located at the bottom of the screen e Archive J archives the selected Email e Delete deletes the currently selected Email e Labels G assigns a label to the current Email e Mark as Unread tags the current message as unread and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox e Newer swiping to the right displays newer Emails Older swiping to the left displays older Emails Messages 143 2 Press E to select one of the following additional options i e Mark important M
287. ndicator When Wi Fi Calling is disabled the call button goes back to show normal operation Call Functions and Contacts List In Call Options Your device provides a number of features that are available for use during a call Personalized Call duration call sound Places a call on hold Dialer Noise Extra volume Reduction Adsa __ 9 E Ends the new call call amp Activates or Se _Mye__ Messe ___ Activates or Deactivates Deactivates speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes Bluetooth the call Headset Note Noise reduction and Extra volume features are disabled while using Wi Fi Calling 74 Adjusting the Call Volume During a call use the Volume keys on the left side of the device to adjust the earpiece volume During a call press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level or Adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset Tap the on screen Personalize call sound button select an equalizer setting for the incoming call e Enabled disabled via the Call settings menu Call settings gt Personalize call sound For more information refer to Configuring General Call Settings on page 292 or Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by tapping the on screen Extra volume button From the Home screen you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys Adjusting Noise Reduction During a call it may be necessary to
288. ne or select Add to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone Tap OK to activate the ringtone Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays Move the Location alarm slider to the right to activate the feature then follow the on screen instructions to enter a location When activated the alarm only sounds when you are at a specific location Move the Snooze slider to the right to activate the feature Tap the field to assign a Interval time 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and Repeat 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times e Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this feature which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to assign a interval time 1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and nature tone Fairy fountain Birdsong by the lake Sparkling mist The secret forest Serenity or Gentle spring rain e Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time e Tone category pr
289. ng e Support needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and e Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public 338 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn accessories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is
290. ng 63 Ending 63 Ending a Call 63 Ending via Status Bar 63 Making a Multi Party Call 77 Pause Dialing 68 Redialing the last number 69 Wait Dialing 68 Call Functons Vibrate 294 Call Rejection 66 292 Call Settings 292 Additional Settings 296 General 292 Call Sound Adding More Volume 74 Personalize 74 75 Call Status Tones 293 Call Vibration 293 295 Call Volume Adjusting 74 Call Waiting 79 296 298 Caller ID 296 Calling Using Wi Fi 71 Calls Auto Reject 292 Making a 62 Multi party 77 Muting 76 Camcorder 158 Accessing the Video Folder 159 Settings 154 Shooting Video 158 Camera 149 Camera Options 151 Enabling Share Shot 161 Quick Settings 153 Settings 154 Taking Pictures 150 Care and Maintenance 350 Charging battery 13 ChatON 145 Adding a Buddy 146 Adding New Buddy 146 Buddy photo share 157 Chatting On 146 Deleting Bubble 147 Register Service 145 Children and Cell Phones 339 Chrome Google 203 Clearing Application cache and data 227 Cloud 318 CMAS 128 Collect Diagnostics 18 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 342 Configuration Initial 16 Connections Accessing the Internet 242 Contact Copying to microSD Card 109 Copying to SIM Card 108 Creating a New 95 Joining 104 New From Keypad 97 Photo 166 Contact Entry Options 104 Contact List Options 102 Contact Menus Options 103 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 100 Adding a Pause or Wait 101 Adding Your Facebook Friends 111 Additional Options 1
291. ng an email address and account password 6 Re enter the password and tap Start Protecting Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you must have an active data 3G 4G LTE or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt PI Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 324 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 3 Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location
292. ng and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Widgets tab 2 Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget 3 Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the screen 4 While still holding the Widget scroll left or right across the available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your current screen To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen 2 Drag the widget over the Remove tab ti and release it e As you place the Widget into the Trash both items turn red e This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the current screen To place a widget onto a different screen 1 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent 2 Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page 3 Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen 4 Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens Understanding Your Device 59 Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To ch
293. ng and tap Next 176 4 Enter your current zip code and tap Done This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box 5 From the Find your TV service screen select a service provider from the available channel listing 6 From the Choose your TV Brand screen tap your TV s manufacturer name e If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector select from one of the following two options Choose from either Other TV Brands or Have a Projector 7 Aim your device at the TV and tap Power to confirm the set up process completed successfully and the correct TV IR codes were selected Note The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10 seconds Please do not press the button again 8 Ifthe TV turned on tap Yes or If the TV did not turn on after tapping Power and waiting 10 seconds tap No or Retry 9 From the Choose Your TV Tuner screen select the entry that corresponds to your current channel control method e Cable Satellite STB PVR DVR selected when changing channels is done via a receiver box Channels are not changed via the TV remote but rather through the receiver box e My xxx TV selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV and no box is used Channels are changed directly on the TV by using the TV remote and not a box s remote Note Try matching your current channel selection method 10 Select the Satellite Box Brand from the a
294. ng data use and tap OK Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down 5 Enable the Broadcast network name SSID field if you would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby devices 6 Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK 7 Enter a new password then write it down Additional options include SHow password and Show advanced options 8 Tap Save to store the new settings 9 Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon A appears at the top of the screen Note By default the connection is not secured Note Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery much faster The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger To connect to the HotSpot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc 2 Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list e The SSID name for your device s hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field e You can change the name by tapping Configure gt Network SSID and changing the entry 3 Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection 4 Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection To change the Portable HotSpot password 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap Mobile HotSpot gt Configure 3 Tap the Security
295. nize applications such as Facebook Twitter MySpace a corporate email account or Google using the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account type with your Contacts list 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt AME Accounts tab and then navigate to the My accounts area 2 Tap Add account 3 Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list Selections are Samsung account ChatON Dropbox Email Google LDAP Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Sync apps with Facebook 4 Tap an account type to add 5 Follow the prompts The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list 6 After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact information For more information refer to Joining Contact Information on page 104 To add Facebook content to your Contacts list You can now add your Facebook contact information such as pictures email and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list All of their current contact information is then migrated over to your phone If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different name separate entries are created and can later be linked joined together into a single entry Important This process not only synchronizes your contact information but also your status events and more 1 From the Home screen tap i Play Store 2 Search for and select the Facebook app
296. nother section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided Note This manual only addresses applications that have been loaded on your device computer tablet as of the date of purchase Information concerning third party applications that you may choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained from the application provider directly Tip To open applications quickly add the icons of frequently used applications to one of the Home screens For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 55 You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens If you add an application as a primary shortcut the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications menu Applications The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the phone Calculator Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Calculator 2 Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key 4 Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key 6 Repeat steps 1 to
297. ns select a vibration type and tap OK e Tap Create to begin creating your own custom vibration 4 Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a check mark if you want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming 5 Tap Keypad tones to create a check mark if you want tones to play when the keypad is pressed Personalize call sound This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a call with and without earphones m From the main Call settings page tap Personalize call sound and activate the feature by selecting an available option For more information refer to Personalizing the Call Sound Setting on page 75 Changing Your Settings 299 Noise reduction This option allows you to suppress background noise during a call m From the main Call settings page tap Noise reduction to create a check mark and enable the feature Increase volume in pocket This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a pocket or a bag It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location m From the main Call settings page tap Increase volume in pocket to create a check mark and enable the feature Voicemail You can view your voicemail number from this menu 1 From the main Call settings page tap Voicemail service 2 If an additional voicemail service is in use other than carrier tap Voice settings to now view your selected voicemail number and information 300 Sound Device Ringtone This option all
298. ns using your hearing aid or cochlear implant to determine if you hear any interfering noise Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility If you have questions about return or exchange policies consult your service provider or phone retailer Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said ac
299. ns are used to represent often used steps gt Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedures Example From the Home screen press Menu gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth Battery Cover The battery micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the gt key until the power off image displays then tap Power off Caution Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during installation or removal Doing so may damage the cover To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 1 2 Place your fingernail in the opening 2 and firmly pop the cover off the device similar to a soda can Release Latch To replace the battery cover Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click SIM Card Overview Important Before removing or replacing the micro SIM card make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the gt key until the power off image displays then tap Power off The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The micro
300. nter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation if desired 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows ABCK 3 Tap anumber symbol or emoticon character 4 Tap BEIS to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 Tap Say to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode 2 Tap the appropriate symbol key or Tap KPA button to cycle through additional pages e The first number on this key indicates which page 1 or 2 of additional characters is active Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on screen text You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature 1 From the keyboard touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel 2 Tap Select input method gt Google voice typing 3 At the Listening prompt Speak now speak Clearly and distinctly into the microphone The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking For more detailed information on configuring Google Voice Typing settings see Configure Google Voice Typing on page 305 4 Tap or Tap Q Resume to resume recognition Done when you are finished Note The feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments Entering Text 93 Using Google Voice Typing 1 From a screen w
301. nterphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage for more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma and a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than 2 hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can be found at http www iarc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200_E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone
302. nued use of damaged batteries Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating 344 e Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids Liquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures e Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated e Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized service center Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can potentially cause
303. o pair and communicate Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Bluetooth 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one is required and tap OK Data Usage Monitor and mange your device s data usage capabilities Features include activation deactivation or network data usage set mobile data usage for a set period of time and view application data usage m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt Data usage Connections To activate deactivate Mobile data usage 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Data usage 2 Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature A green check mark indicates the feature is active 3 Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the feature To set a mobile data limit 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Data usage 2 Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field 3 Read the on screen disclaimer info and tap OK Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange horizontal lines to manually adjust bo
304. oad offline speech recognition enables voice input while offline e Personalized recognition enables the improvement of speech recognition accuracy e Google Account dashboard allows you to manage your collected data 310 Bluetooth headset records audio through a connected Bluetooth headset 3 Press gt to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt Text to speech options 2 Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available options Select Google Text to speech Engine or Samsung text to speech engine The default is Google Text to speech 3 Tap poy next to the preferred TTS engine configure the following settings e Language allows you to set the language for spoken text e Settings for Google Text to speech Engine allows you to view Open Source Licenses e Settings for Samsung text to speech engine allows you to configure the General settings for the Samsung TTS e Install voice data allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Speech rate adjusts the rate at which on screen text is Motions and Gestures Settings This feature allows you to assi
305. oards Note Only available when ABC mode is selected Predictive text advanced settings are available only if the Predictive function is enabled 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Language and input gt g adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods gt Fey to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen In a single motion touch and slide the Predict slider to the right to turn it on ive text Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options e Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language data that you have entered and selected your text entry prediction results better By enabling you can choose from the following personalization io make this feature features e Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account and add used text to your perso dictionary e Learn from Gmail allows you to sign in to your exi account from where your style and existing contac nal isting Gmail information is added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names e Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your exi account and add used text to your personal diction sting Twitter ary e Learn from Messaging allows your device to learn your messaging style by using your Messaging informal ion e Learn from
306. ome Terms of Service and tap Accept and Continue 3 If you have an existing Chrome account tap Sign in to bring your open tabs bookmarks and omnibox data from your computer to your phone otherwise tap No thanks 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google Chrome Apps gt Clock Here you can set an Alarm configure and view the World clock use a Stopwatch set a Timer or use a Desk Clock The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt wy Clock Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap Hd Apps gt o Clock 2 From the Alarm tab tap Create alarm 3 Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected 4 Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are day blocks or Repeat Weekly Selected day blocks turn blue when active 5 Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following Melody Vibration Vibration and melody or Briefing Applications and Development 203 6 Tap More to configure additional alarm settings such as volume slider Alarm tone Location alarm Snooze Smart alarm and assign a name To configure additional alarm settings 1 2 204 Tap More to access additional alarm settings Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available to
307. on T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap E T Mobile Name ID 2 Choose an on screen option T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand m From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt MY T Mobile Tv For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 198 Apps gt Talk You can instant message with Google Talk Google Talk allows you to communicate with other people who are also connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web m From the Home screen tap 35 Apps gt Talk For more information refer to Google Talk on page 144 TripAdvisor With the TripAdvisor you can plan and have your perfect trip With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers it is easy to find the best hotels restaurants and fun things to do 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt TripAdvisor 2 Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not already done so 3 Follow the on screen instructions to use TripAdvisor 4 Press l for additional options Applications and Development 237 Video The Video player application plays video files stored locally m From the Home screen tap te Apps gt gt Video For more information refer to Using Video on page 169 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to v
308. on Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty 362 For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties
309. on notification to this event Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick responses for outbound emails These are default responses similar to those used by text templates Applications and Development 201 Camera Use your 13 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format Note A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures or shoot video It is recommended that you confirm your default storage location for images and videos m From the Home screen tap cad Apps gt Camera For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 150 202 ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat In this service you can send pictures videos animation messages Scribbles audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location information Create special animated messages for your friends using handwritten messages text photos background images and music 1 From the Home screen tap Chaton 2 Log in to the service and follow the on screen instructions Apps gt For more information visit https web samsungchaton com For more information refer to ChatON on page 145 Chrome The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web browser on your device 1 From the Home screen tap Chrome 2 Read the Google Chr
310. on process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device Multimedia 161 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established Confirm appears in the Status bar 6 When prompted to complete the connection the recipient should tap OK Your status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing 7 Each partner including yourself must then tap Accept to consent to the new Wi Fi Direct pairing To enable Share shot on Camera 1 From the Home screen tap Camera gt EX re shot Quick Settings gt lt r Share gt SA Sha 2 If you are prompted to activate your Wi Fi Direct connection tap OK and follow the activation procedures for Wi Fi Direct 162 To configure your Share Shot options 1 2 3 4 Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active S3 appears at the top of the screen Tap lt Devices for sharing with to display list of current share shot participants e Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and removing the green check mark Tap S3 Shooting modes to regain access to the Share menu Tap 3 gt Off to disable share shot while maintaining a Wi Fi Direct connection To take share shot images 1 2 Tap a Camera until the shutter sounds From the Home scree
311. on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated 4 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures Changing Your Settings 313 e Capture screen Once enabled you can capture any on screen information swiping across the screen In a single motion press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right The image is then copied to the clipboard Palm Swipe to Screen Capture Mute pause Once enabled you can pause any on screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand Once you remove your hand from the screen the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound 314 Gyroscope Calibration Calibrate your device by using the built in gyroscope 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures gt Gyroscope calibration 2 Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate The phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer During the calibration process a green circle appears on screen and the center circle adjusts to the center position Smart screen The Smart screen options allow you to customize your screen settings to make the screen more responsive and easier to use _ 1 From the Home screen press and then
312. one of the following options e Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number e Call forwarding configures the forwarding settings For more information refer to Configuring Call Forwarding on page 297 e Auto area code allows you to automatically prepend a specific area code to all outbound calls e Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc e Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call e Auto redial automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off e Fixed dialing Numbers manages fixed dialing numbers See description below Configuring Call Forwarding 1 From the main Call settings page tap Additional settings gt Call forwarding Important Call Forwarding is disabled when the Wi Fi Calling feature is enabled 2 Tap an available option e Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a secondary number that you specify e Forward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy e Forward when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and itherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number e Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turn
313. ook store page by clicking the Books link a the top ofthe page e You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media e GAMES displays featured Game content available from the Content later subject to content re download availability and Game store This page also allows you to search for new content or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking the Games link a the top of the page 3 To purchase or view featured content in more detail tap on any content Thumbnail or text to navigate to the product detail page 174 content provider permissions e You may need network coverage to access Media Content you have acquired through the Service e You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity to download Media Content Unlike purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be e Inno event will rented Media Content be available for a period viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized after the Media Content has been rented e g if you begin device s SD card No SD Card included out of box viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented where there is a
314. oper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception Warranty Information 359 or transmission or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a
315. opy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source licenses The open source license provisions may override some of the terms of this EULA We make the applicable open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings menu of your device 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Samsung or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services relat
316. or Light effect e Help text shows help information on the Lock screen e Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake up your phone e Set wake up command designates your wake up commands Tap Set wake up command and follow the on screen prompts to create a new verbal command Changing Your Settings 281 Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Swipe Using Face Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Face unlock Read the on screen notification and tap Next 4 From the About Face Unlock screen tap Set it up gt Continue 5 Follow the on screen instructions 6 If your face is not recognized choose an unlocking method Pattern or PIN 282 Face unlock options Once Face unlock is enabled additional options are available e Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed on your home screens e Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your device s face matching capability by capturing your face in different lighting with or without
317. ore 2 If not already logged in with your Google account tap Next 3 Tap Existing and enter your Google account information 4 Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application you will need to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store The home page provides several ways to find applications The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt 5 Play Store 2 Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name 3 Read the application descriptions Apps gt Applications and Development 225 Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device the Play Store displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution 4 Tap Install gt Accept amp download Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application 6 Check the progress of the c
318. ore networks gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list Important You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup 3 Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network s re Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually Changing Your Settings 275 Tethering and Mobile HotSpot This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless version of this same functionality would be the Mobile AP feature Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt
319. os Use highe ality Higher resolution photos take up resolution for higher q more memory s e Burst shot allows several photographs to be captured in quick succession by touching and holding the Camera button e Face detection allows you to adjust on face detection tech Metering allows you meters the light source Center weigh he camera focus based o set how the camera measures or ited Matrix or Spot e ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera Choose from Auto 100 200 400 or 800 Use a lower ISO number to make your came a less sensitive to light a higher ISO number to take photos with less light or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots e Anti Shake compensates for camera movement e Auto night detection activates or deactivates the night detection feature e Save as allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image Camcorder e Video size Select a resolution for videos Use higher resolution for higher quality Higher resolution videos take up more memory e Video stabilization Activate or deactivate Optical Image Stabilization Settings e GPS tag attach a GPS location tag to the photo To improve GPS signals avoid shoo ing in locations where the signal may be obstructed such as between buildings or in low lying areas or in poor weather condi ions Your location may
320. ount manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link Chat On and Samsung Hub 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap Samsung Link Apps gt 192 3 If prompted with an on screen notification about no Wi Fi detected tap Cancel to continue by using your network connection or Connect to continue 4 Tap Sign in 5 If prompted to log into your Samsung account tap Sign in and follow the on screen instructions Note If the main screen still shows a Sign in box close the application and restart it 6 Follow the on screen prompts 7 Scroll across the application screen to view either MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES amp STORAGE The DEVICES amp STORAGE screen contains two separate streaming media options e Registered storage allows you to receive and playback media stored externally server laptop etc directly on your device by allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming content e Registered devices allows you to stream share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same Wireless Access Point Configuring Samsung Link Settings The Samsung Link application must first be configured prior to its initial use You must setup parameters such as connected Wi Fi Items to share source server address and external device acceptance rights 1 From th
321. ovides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm Tap Save to store the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm m To stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide to any direction Setting the Snooze Feature m To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide to any direction Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings Deleting an Existing Alarm 1 From within the Clock application touch and hold an on screen alarm event 2 Tap Delete World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From within the Clock application tap the World clock tab 2 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settings 3 Select a DST setting Automatic Off or 1 hour If Daylight Savings Time is selected a sun symbol appears next to the World Clock city listing Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From within the Clock application tap Stopwatch tab Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter Tap Stop to stop the counter Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter ogo Pen
322. ows you to assign your default device ringtone 1 From the main Call settings page tap Sound 2 Selecta ringtone and tap OK Vibrate This option allows you to activate a vibration for an incoming call m From the main Call settings page tap Vibrate field to toggle the feature on or off TTY Mode ATTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your device is compatible with select TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable 1 From the main Call settings page tap TTY mode 2 Tap TTY Full TTY HCO or TTY VCO to activate the feature or TTY Off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Blocking Mode When Blocking mode is enabled notifications for selected features will be disabled You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list 1 From the gl screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on Confirm the Blocking mode
323. ows you to back up into a higher directory e Press and then tap View by to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail e Press for these additional options Select all Create folder Search View by Sort by and Settings Applications and Development 219 To navigate 1 Tap All files gt Device storage SD memory card to see the contents of either device or your internal SD card 2 The following folders may display e ShareShot displays the files shared via a group share shot session e Alarms this folder contains any alarm files you may have e Android the Android folder stores files that are used in Android applications e Application this folder contains app info for S Memo e Bluetooth this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device e DCIM this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by the device Tap DCIM gt Camera to view the picture or video files e Download this folder contains downloads you have made Movies this folder contains your Video and Movie files Music this folder contains your Music files e Notifications this folder contains all of the notifications you have received e Pictures this folder contains your photos e Podcasts this folder contains all of your podcasts 220 Ringtones this folder contains any ringtones you have purchased e S Memo this folder contains all the S M
324. p Fey Settings then select it from the available options 1 From within an active message tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap Input Methods to use the default Voice typing input method to convert your spoken words to on screen text T or 0 Touch and hold to select from other input methods such as e Handwriting to launch an on screen handwriting area that can be used to convert on screen patterns text to text e Clipboard to launch the device s clipboard area from where you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current message e Optical Reader to the camera and have the built in Optical Reader application recognize text e Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu e Keyboard alignment to detach the on screen keyboard so that you can manually dock it anywhere on the current text entry screen Selecting the feature again redocks the keyboard into its original location using the original size Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e Abc to use alphabetic characters from the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays ESMA e Symbol Numeric Eaa to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode th
325. patible phones batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to serious injuries damages to your phone or other serious hazard Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly Health and Safety Information 345 Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and accessories may not be available in your area We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take back companies in every state in the country Drop It Off You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect usactivities environment _samsungrecyclingdirect_ locations jsp Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted at these locations for no fee Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional information regarding specific locations m
326. portant Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Launch Samsung Link on the target device such as an Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc 2 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt PK Gallery Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature 3 Open a selected image 4 Tap Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming 5 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source 6 Confirm AllShare Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source Taking a Screen Shot Also known as a screen capture this feature allows you to mimic the print screen function on most computers 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated 4 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position 5 With the current screen showing the desired image in a single motion place the side of your palm along the one side of the device and then slowly swipe it in th
327. prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider e Tap Send email from this account by default to assign this email account as your default account for all outgoing emails 4 Tap Next 5 At the Account options screen select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next Important The Sync Email feature must be enabled to allow synching between your device and the remote server e Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications e Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when using Wi Fi 6 At the Set up email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify yourself on this account e The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device 7 Tap Done to store the new account Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Opening an Email 1 From the Home screen tap EH gt Email 2 Tap account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts managed by the application to be listed on a single screen 3 Sel
328. put additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization Email IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap N and use the on screen keypad to enter a new phone number Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause or Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap Add to Contacts gt Update existing 4 Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select the desired target Note This new phone number is then added as a new number 6 to the selected entry Tap the label button to the left of the new phone number and scroll through the list to select a category type Tap Save to store and update the entry Deleting Contacts Important Once Contacts list entries are deleted they cannot 1 2 be recovered From the Home screen tap Ey Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK Contacts 101 Contact List Options 1 2 102 From the Home screen tap Press
329. r call is not sent to voicemail Note If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device launching Keypad etc you might be accidentally swiping over the front sensors Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 In a single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else multi task such as access the Contacts list view a recent email locate a picture etc In Call Notification Story Album Ending a Call m Briefly tap key to end the call Note To redial a recent number tap at the end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap Call Ending a Call from the Status Bar 1 From an active call you can launch a separate application or return to the Home screen The current call is kept active in the background 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap End to end the currently active call 2 Call Functions and Contacts List 63
330. r image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Travel wallpaper to display recommended destination images on your lock screen Select a slideshow interval e Tap Wallpaper scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Understanding Your Device 61 Section 3 Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes features and functionality associated with making or answering calls and the Contacts list which is used to store contact information Displaying Your Phone Number m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt About device gt Status Your phone number displays in the My phone number field Note The device s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing and then tapping FH Apps gt Settings 62 Making a Call You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card or to the device s memory These entries are referred to as the Contacts list 1 2 From the Home screen tap Phone Enter the phone number and then tap KE If you make a mistake while dialing tap clear the last digit Touch and hold to _ to clear the entire sequence Note When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings gt Additional settings menu the device automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided you
331. re When you have two participants in a multi party session it might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are in a multi party call 1 Press E and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap lt Split Caller adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed 78 Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling feature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature 3 Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold 4 To return to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other Dropping One Participant 1 Press and then tap Manage conference call gt to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant 2 Tap to end your conversation with the remaining caller Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting opt
332. rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the 360 remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits o
333. received files 1 Verify Bluetooth is active i 2 From the Bluetooth settings page press 11 and then tap Received files gg Connections 251 Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode To pair your device with another Bluetooth device 1 2 Verify Bluetooth is active From the Bluetooth settings page tap the Visibility field shown by the device name Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an external device This is shown by a green check mark Tap Scan Your device displays a list of discovered in range Bluetooth devices Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing Enter the passkey or PIN code if needed and tap OK 252 6 The external device must accept the connection and enter your device s PIN code Once successfully paired to an external device displays in the Status area Note Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or
334. reen Connections Ce My device Connections This tab allows you to see all of settings related to the connection of your device to external sources Features include Wi Fi Bluetooth Data usage More networks Airplane mode Mobile networks Tethering and Mobile HotSpot VPN and Wi Fi Calling NFC S Beam Nearby devices Screen Mirroring and Kies via Wi Fi My device This tab provides access to device configuration and customization features Features include Lock screen Display LED indicator Sound Home screen mode Call Blocking mode Power saving mode Accessory Accessibility Language and input Motions and gestures Smart screen Air view and Voice control Changing Your Settings 263 SS Accounts Accounts This tab provides both the ability to create and modify your accounts ex Samsung account Email etc configure Cloud functionality and access Backup and reset features amp we This tab provides access to the remaining set of device settings not listed under the other three tabs These include Location services Security Application manager Battery Storage Date and time and About device Note The settings for your device are described below using the order in which they appear in the Settings menu Functions found under the Connections tab are listed first followed by My device Accounts and More tabs 264 Wi Fi Settings This section describes the Wi Fi settings For
335. reen Tap Combined View gt Just for you lt 4 From the On TV tab press I and then select Settings a 5 Access parameters such as Basic info Genres and Sports to then configure and enable those parameters you would like to show in the Just for you tab To add a new room Your device can be used to control boxes receivers from several rooms You could go from controlling your set top box in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do the same 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt watcnon 3 From the On TV tab press and then select Settings gt Add room 4 Name the new room and tap Next 5 Enter your current zip code and tap Done This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box 6 Follow steps 4 10 from page 176 to complete the process Multimedia 179 Play Movies amp TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Choose from thousands of movies including new releases and HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android device Movies previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies 1 From the Home screen tap BE Play Movies amp TV 2 Log on to your Google account if you have not already done
336. refinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to zoom out Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to Zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to zoom in Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 55 e Motion Navigation and Activation The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motions and Gestures Settings on page 311 Accessing Recently Used Apps 1 Press and hold from any screen to open the recently used applications window 2 Tap an icon to open the selected application or Tap g to go to the Task manager or Tap to go to Google Search Tap Ea to delete the record of all recently used applications Using Motions and Gestures By activating the various motion and gesture features within this menu page 311 you can access a variety of time saving functions Caution Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause unintended results To learn how to properly control motions tap E Apps gt Settings gt My device tab gt Motions and gestures When tapped each entry comes with an on screen tutorial m From the Home scre
337. rent Wi Fi group Users must be on the same Wi Fi and provide an access code to join the group This feature functions with an external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV Important You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi Fi and be using an active registered Samsung account prior to using this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 264 For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as Samsung Link 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt Samsung Link 2 If prompted read the on screen message about network charges and tap OK to continue and return to the main screen 3 If prompted tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account Note If the main screen still shows a Sign in box close the application and restart it 4 Tap Start and follow the on screen prompts For more information refer to Samsung Link on page 191 Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone m From the Home screen tap z Apps gt Settings From the Home screen press and then tap Settings For more information ref
338. reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 38 2 Tap a notification entry to open the associated application 2 Clearing Notifications 1 Inasingle motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 2 Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel Accessing Additional Screen Functions In addition to notifications this screen also provides quick and ready access to device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated Scrolling across a horizontal list of functions has been enhanced with an accessible Grid view Note You can select the function buttons you see at the top of the Notifications panel Only 5 buttons are shown at any one time The Grid view is the only way to view all functions To activate the Grid view m From the Notification panel tap E Open Grid view to display additional functions To minimize the Grid view m From the Notification panel tap Close Grid view to show only your primary functions To customize the functions displayed 1 From the Notification screen tap FA Open Grid view to display additional functions 2 Tap e Edit then locate the Notifications panel area located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen 3 In a single motion touch and hold a desired function then drag it to the top row Understanding Your
339. riority or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly Device has priority e Security options allows you to enable several security options such as Encryption Encryption algorithm Sign Sign algorithms Email certificates and Security policy list These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Security policy list lists the current email s security policy These policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings 5 Press 5 to return to the previous page 142 Using Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is Google s web based email When you first setup the phone Gmail is configured Depending on the synchronization settings Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account Signing into Google Mail 1 From the Home screen tap Ea gt hadi Gmail Note You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Play Store 2 Tap New if you do not have a Google account or Tap Existing if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email Opening Gmail 1 From the Home screen tap Ea gt m Gmail 2 Tap an existing email message Refreshing Gmail Mail m From within the Gmail message list tap 5 Refresh at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen send a
340. rocess where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat 336 Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below Interphone Study I
341. roperability with support for all major VPN Gateways 1 From the Home screen tap VPN Client 2 Follow the on screen instructions to configure the VPN Client e Options include Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections WatchON With the WatchON application you can use your device as a remote control for your TV Apps gt Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt WatchON For more information refer to Using WatchON on page 176 240 YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt dh YouTube 2 Tap the search field Q to search for specific videos scroll down to browse through the main page thumbnails or scroll to the bottom to explore additional options 3 To view a video tap an available preview thumbnail or tap the title link To configure YouTube Settings m Press I and then tap Settings and configure the following parameters e General High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Huge
342. rted 25 Google Now Google Now recognizes a users repeated actions performed on the device including access of common locations repeated calendar appointments search queries etc This information is then used to display more relevant information to the user in the form of cards These scrollable on screen cards are displayed when the Google Now application is launched These cards are not manually added The service uses your GPS Google Search and usage information to generate these cards automatically To initially set up Google Now 1 Press and hold Home and then tap Google Now 2 Follow the on screen instructions to review the available information 3 When prompted agree to launch the application Some initial on screen cards are shown A default is the Weather card that provides updated weather information in your area 26 To configure the Google Now settings 1 Press and hold and then tap Google Now 2 Press ml and select Settings 3 Access each desired Settings page and configure it as desired When these condition are met new card information will begin to appear in the Google Now list of cards Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your device It also describes the device s keys screen and the icons that display when the device is in use Features of Your Device Your device is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant fea
343. s Note To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is available at http www samsung com kies for Windows Mac Note If you are a Windows XP user ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer Also ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2 0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer Connecting as a Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory If you insert a memory card in the device you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader Note The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk separate from the internal memory 1 Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to the computer After a few seconds a pop up window displays on the PC when connected 2 Open the folder to view files 3 Copy files from the PC to the memory card Connections 255 Wi Fi About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point WAP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi networ
344. s displays gas station location relative to your current location e ATMs amp banks displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current location e Restaurants displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location While on the map screen press I 1 to access additional options Set destination returns you to the navigation options screen where you can access a destination by either Speaking Typing or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place Search manually search for a destination address place name of business or even a type of business Layers allows you to switch map views See previous description e Settings provides access to both Power settings Screen dimming and Information Terms privacy amp notices e Exit navigation terminates the application e Help provides on screen help Optical Reader Play Books The Photo reader allows you to use your camera to identify Formerly known as Google Books this application allows you text via definitions and extract useful information to read over 3 million ebooks on the go 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books jump Optical Reader right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free 2 Aim the camera at an object containing written words ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and set
345. s or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims 370 exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of this device To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the device was purchased c the device model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the device box ii on the device information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the bac
346. s select Edit network Make the desired VPN setting changes Tap Save os PON Delete a VPN 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt VPN 2 Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete 3 Tap Delete network within the pop up that opens up Wi Fi Calling You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an active Wi Fi connection Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 71 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks 3 In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi Calling slider to the right to turn it on Changing Your Settings 277 Wi Fi Calling Settings Important A compatible SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Wi Fi Calling 2 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature e Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular
347. s a scrollable list of recently accessed documents e Menu provides access to Settings and Help e Samples provides access to sample Word PowerPoint and Excel files e File Browser allows you to search on your device and SD card for compatible documents Form type allows you to quickly access your documents based on file type Each type is separated into several available tabs located at the bottom of the screen such as Word Excel PowerPoint Other and PDF e Favorites allows you to list only those documents tagged as Favorite e View Together once connected to the same Wi Fi you can share or collaborate with other Polaris users S Health S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better manage your health by providing you with relevant information 1 w NOJA From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt amp S Health Read the introduction and tap Next Read the Terms and conditions information place a checkmark in the Agree checkbox Tap Next Enter your personal information then tap Start Follow the on screen instructions to use S Health Press and then tap Help for more detailed information S Memo The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the keypad your finger or both You can add images voice recordings and text all in one place Creating a New Memo 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt S S Memo The S Memo screen is displayed 2 Tap an existing
348. s account as the default email account used for outgoing messages Messages 135 136 Tap the More settings field to access additional options e Account name displays your uniquely created account display name e Your name displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails e Forward with attachments Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email Recent messages adjusts the number of on screen messages shown in the current category list at any one time e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Number of emails to load allows you to select the number of n screen emails to keep loaded on the screen by default e Auto download attachments allows the device to utomatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection So o e Auto resend times enables the device to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails e Security options allows yo such as Encrypt all Sign al u to enable several security options Create keys Private keys Public keys and Set default key Th
349. s and tap Start Follow the on screen instructions to set up your personal call sound Changing Your Settings 291 Home Screen Mode This application allows you to set your display to the conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier user experience for the first time smartphone users using Easy mode 1 From the gi screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt af Home screen mode 2 Tap the pull down Dropbox and select one of the following options Standard mode provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets on your home screens Easy mode provides easier user experience for first time smartphone users on the home screens 3 Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to update the device with the new look and feel 292 Call Settings 1 From the Home screen tap W 2 Press and then tap Call settings From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt My device tab gt Call To access the Call settings menu _ 1 From the Home screen tap WwW Phone 2 Press i and then tap Call settings Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 From the Home screen tap Ww Phone Press and then tap Call settings 2 Tap one of the following options e Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages Auto re
350. s feature allows you to create a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages Signature text allows you to enter a desired signature for your message Spam message settings e Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings such as Add to spam numbers allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Add to spam phrases allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend 128 Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency A
351. s of Service YouTube Terms of Service Google Mobile Privacy Policy YouTube Privacy Policy Open source licenses App version displays the software version for the current YouTube application To watch a high quality video m Press and then tap Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile Applications and Development 241 Section 9 Connections Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the Web Internet Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile Web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser m From the Home screen tap a Apps gt Internet Note You must disable your Wi Fi connection if you wish to view the T Mobile home page http ml t mobile com You may be prompted to allow your device to use your current location 242 Navigating with the Browser 1 Tap an entry to select an item 2 Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to scroll through a website 3 To return to a previous page tap i 4 To move forward to a Web page tap Ey Browser Options 1 From the top of the browser screen select one of the available options e Navigation use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your browsing activity e Refresh reloads the current page e Windows displays a list of the windows you have open Bookmarks provid
352. s page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the on screen notification and tap OK Note At least one feature must be activated before Motion can be activated 4 Ina single motion slide a feature s activation slider to the on position The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures e Direct call Once enabled the device will dial the currently displayed on screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear Smart alert Once enabled pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages Zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out Browse an image Once enabled touch and hold a desired on screen image to pan around it Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on screen image Mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture To activate Palm Motion 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Motions and gestures 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on 3 Read the
353. s point names display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name Network mode You can configure your device to either automatically select the LTE option LTE GSM WCDMA auto connect by default GSM WCDMA auto connect GSM only or WCDMA only m From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode e LTE GSM WCDMA auto connect is the default network mode option This selection allows the device to choose the fastest connection from among the available connection speeds including LTE e GSM WCDMA auto connect allows you to exclude the LTE network and choose from only 4G 3G and 2G networks e GSM only restricts your connection to only the 2G network e WCDMA only restricts your connection to only the 3G network Changing Your Settings 273 Using the LTE Network Option To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection the device has an automatic detection method where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection communication method from among this selected set LTE 4G 3G 2G 1 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt More networks gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap LTE GSM WCDMA auto connect A selection indicator displays next to this option to show that it is active This is the default mode for this device Using the GSM WCDMA Option If you wish to not use LTE but still r
354. s you to edit the shortcuts shown at the bottom of full screen mode e Hide Show shortcuts allows you to hide or view the current on screen shortcuts located along the bottom of the full screen mode Settings provides access to the Desk clock settings menu from where you can alter the following Hide status bar Wallpaper Calendar Weather and Dock e Date and time provides access to the Date and time menu Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt EJ Contacts For more information refer to Contacts List on page 95 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt g Downloads 2 Place a checkmark on an available file to select it 3 Choose an available action such as Share Delete Sort by size date or Clear list Dropbox Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from your device This applications allows you to bring your files with you when you re on the go edit files in your Dropbox from your device upload photos and videos to Dropbox and share your selected files freely with family and friends The in device application works in conjunction with a partner program placed on a target computer using an active Internet connection Dropbox creates a folder that automatic
355. se from different receivers boxes in different rooms Ex Living Room box Bedroom box etc Press gt Back to return to the main menu Locating your favorite programming 1 2 Sign into your Samsung account From the Home screen tap matenon From the main screen Tap Combined View to reveal available media categories Select an available category Apps gt Tap Guide to display on your TV an on screen listing of available set top box shows For additional information on the WatchON application press and then select Help 178 WatchOn Settings From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt watcnon Press and then select an available on screen option f e Change Room allows you to select a previously configured room e Settings provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings menu e Help displays on screen help information e About displays on screen information about the application Personalize WatchON You can personalize your application to do things such as show content only from your selected media categories or add an additional room s set top box To configure your Just for you settings The Just for you option displays available content matching your activated media categories These categories can be configured during your initial set up or at any later time 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt watcnow 3 From the main sc
356. sic Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the device from the Play Store Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card Removing Music Files 1 From within the Music application tap the Songs tab 2 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Delete gt OK The music file s is deleted Samsung Link This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s Link makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer Multimedia 191 Important You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi Fi and be using an active registered Samsung account prior to using this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 264 For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 Note For more information on defining the various features definitions on page 234 Important The Samsung acc
357. sic video audio from both files will be played simultaneously Understanding Your Device 51 In this example we will be launching both the Internet and Maps applications 1 Launch an application From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt Internet 2 Activate the Multi window feature 3 Tap the tab to display the apps panel 4 Touch and hold the desired app such as Maps until it detaches from the panel 5 Ina single motion drag it over the current app and drop the new Multi window app over either the top or bottom area of the current on screen app Note Once two applications are running the device displays a split screen view containing both the initial app and the new Multi window app Each application is still independent of the other 52 To switch the arrangement of the applications 1 To increase the size of a desired application window 1 With the two App 1 Split Maximize applications shown ina split screen tap the gt TEZ Border bar to show the Kaia a on screen icons 5 Tap the desired application area top or bottom STS Locate and tap oD Switch app location The current apps are switched With the two applications shownina App 2 Border Switch split screen locate the Bar Positions Border bar indicating the edge of the app window 2 Ina single motion touch and hold the Border bar then drag it to resize the desired window To split the current applications 1 With the two
358. site s request to control zoom e Text encoding adjusts the current text encoding e Fullscreen allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the status bar e Text booster allows you to boost the text size on PC websites to make it easier to read Content settings Accept cookies Allows sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device e Enable location Allows websites to request access to your location e Enable JavaScript Enables Javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages may not display properly Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Block pop ups Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Default storage Allows you to set your default storage to Device or Memory Card Website settings View advanced settings for individual websites e Enable notifications Allows website notifications Select Always on On demand or Off e Clear notifications Deletes website notification access information e Reset settings Restores all settings to default Bandwidth management e Preload web pages Allows the browser to preload Web pages Choose from Always Only on Wi Fi or Never e Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website e Open pages in overview Displays an overview of newly opened web pages Connections 249 Bluetooth Abou
359. so A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list 3 Following the on screen instructions for renting and viewing movies 4 Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented 5 Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented 6 Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your device or memory card Apps gt 180 For more information on using the Picture in Picture feature for video playback see Using Picture In Picture on page 170 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m Access the new music tab from within your Play Store application The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt we Play Music The Music app searches both your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent music organized by album If prompted follow the on screen instructions to link your current account to Google Play Music Tap an on screen account to add it or select Add
360. ss Voice Mail using the menu 1 From the Home screen tap N and then touch and hold 4 e until the device dials voicemail Note Touching and holding 1 will launch the voicemail application 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voicemail center Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1 Dial your wireless phone number 2 When you hear your voicemail greeting press the asterisk key on the phone you are using 3 Enter your passcode Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt pA Visual Voicemail 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next Note You must subscribe to the Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 3 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back Getting Started 23 To check Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt J Visual Voicemail 2 Tap the voicemail message you want to play 3 Tap J Pa To delete Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt J Visual Voicemail 2 Tap the voicemail message you want to delete 3 Tap T Delete gt OK 24 Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously with some applications running in the bac
361. sting Logs or Contacts or Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must match for the spam action to take effect Choose from Same as Starts with ex 800 or 888 Ends with or includes 6 Tap Save To register text phrases as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with a phone number but rather an email address In these cases the only way to block those messages would be assign a key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block Ex Dear friend Stock Alert or Act Now 1 From the Home screen tap T 2 Press E and then tap Settings 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option 130 4 Tap Add to spam phrases gt Add e This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend 5 Enter a term or word into the field Note The term is case sensitive Ex Act Now is not the same as act now 6 Tap Save To register unknown numbers as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with either a phone number or email address These incoming messages contain no information as their info is blocked by the sender 1 From the Home screen tap v 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option 4 Tap Block unknown senders A green check mark indicates the feature is active e Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown so
362. sung as eligible for the Update After the Update you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your Update eligibility The updated Software version may add new functions and in some limited cases may delete existing functions Warranty Information 365 While the Update will be generally available in some limited circumstances the Software updates will only be offered by your network carrier and such Software updates will be governed by your contractual relationship with your network carrier With the Automatic Update function enabled as in the default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting your device downloads some Updates automatically from time to time Your device will however ask for your consent before installing any Update If you choose to disable the Automatic Update function then you can check the availability of new Updates by clicking on the Check Update menu in the Setting We recommend that you check availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your device If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update downloads then you should choose the Wi Fi Only option in the Setting Regardless of the option you choose the Automatic Update function downloads Updates only through Wi Fi connection 6 Some features of the Software may require your device to have access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by your ne
363. t Settings on page 305 To turn the device off 1 Press and hold Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Power off Restarting the Device 1 Press and hold Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Restart 2 Locking and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off m Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Security on page 325 Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Talk and the Google Play Store applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account To create a new Google Account from your device 1 From the Home screen tap S Play Store 2 Read the introduction and tap New to begin 3 Follow the on screen instructions to create a Google Account O If this is not the first time you are starting the device tap Ea gt MVI Gmail Note If you already have a Google account you only need to sign in Getting Started
364. t Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt MASM Connections tab 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 From the Home screen press 11 and then tap Settings gt Connections tab 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off 250 Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when Bluetooth is active Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and communicating Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including e Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description e Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices e Displaying your device s
365. t Contact entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox if enabled Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Print contact info allows you to print selected information on a compatible Samsung printer e Add shortcut to home adds a shortcut to the current Contacts entry to an available screen location Contacts 103 Contact Entry Options 1 From the Home screen tap Ey 2 Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen This screen contains Name contact numbers email and linked contact information 3 Press to reveal the context menu specific to this entry 4 Tap an available option amp Print contact info Contact Overview Screen 104 Joining Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts When you synchronize your phone with those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your contacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those acco
366. t date format and select the date format type 332 About Device This menu contains legal information system tutorial information and other phone information such as the model number firmware version baseband version kernel version and software build number To access phone information m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab About device The following information displays e Software update allows you to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option e Status displays the battery status the level of the battery percentage the Network connection Signal strength Mobile network type Service state Roaming status Mobile network state My phone number IMEI number IP address Wi Fi MAC address Bluetooth address Serial number Up time and Device status e Legal information This option displays information about Open source licenses Google legal information as well as License settings This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service Terms of Service for Android powered Phones and much more pertinent information as a reference Read the information and terms then press 5 to retum to the Settings menu Tip To find your device s Divx registration code and information about
367. t disturbing background noise e Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience so you can hear clearly and don t need to speak louder to overcome surrounding noise The noise suppression technology is built in and already enabled in your new mobile phone So it s ready to provide unsurpassed voice clarity with every call Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started 0cee Understanding this User Manual Battery Cover 000000 ee eee BAON i e tue eaears Sows Extending Your Battery Life Initial Device Configuration Switching the Device On or Off Restarting the Device Locking and Unlocking the Device Creating a New Google Account Signing into Your Google Account Retrieving your Google Account Password Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location 005e Creating a Samsung Account Voice Mail 0 00 cece eee Visual Voicemail 00 cee Task Manager 200000 Google NOW 0 cece eee eee eee Section 2 Understanding Your Device 27 Features of Your Device 27 FROME VIEW cssc od eed oatieesa steals amanda 28 BaGk VIEW o cicania Santee dye einne E 30 Side VOWS ccsccsspennitersisiriniiiai 31 Device Display 000000 32 Status Bar oo eee E 32 Function KeyS
368. t from your calendar e Location allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location e Contacts allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry then add it to your message by tapping Done 122 Adding Additional Text You can copy text such as names phone numbers and events from your Contacts Calendar or a Memo 1 While composing a message press I gt Add text 2 At the Add text screen select one of the following e S Memo allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo e Calendar allows you to add the name date and time of a calendar event to your message e Location allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps e Contacts allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message e Text templates allows you to add pre defined phrases and sentences For more information refer to Text Templates on page 131 The information is added to your message Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 38 or From the Home screen tap bad then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen Tap to play a multimedia message e To pause playb
369. t has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 342 e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s
370. t set of entered digits 3 Tap EE 4 Once prompted to Send the following tones tap Yes to dial the remaining digits Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed received or missed if the caller is identified To recall any ofthese numbers 1 From the Home screen tap WW 2 Tap the Logs tab to display the list of recent calls 3 Tap the name number and tap K Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List you can set up to 99 speed dial entries 2 100 and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key Note Speed dial location 1 must be reserved for Voicemail use Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important Speed dial location 1 is reserved for Voicemail No other number can be assigned to this slot 1 From the Home screen tap Ww gt a A Keypad tab 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the numbers 2 through 100 3 Tap an unassigned number slot The Select contact screen displays 4 Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box Call Functions and Contacts List 69 Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap 5 gt Keypad tab 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting Important The numb
371. t to edit Tap Edit bookmark Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL Tap the Location field to assign a new folder location Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation Deleting Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to delete 2 Tap Delete bookmark 3 At the confirmation window tap OK Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your device at any time 1 From an active Web page press and then tap Settings gt Privacy gt Delete personal data 2 Tap Cookies and site data to create a checkmark 3 Tap Done Using Web History The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages pa 1 From an active Web page press 1 and then tap History m 2 Select a visited range category Choose from Today Last 7 days or Most visited 3 Tap an entry to display the webpage sots Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list Saved Pages The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites that you have saved 1 From an active Web page press 1 and the
372. t will sound for notifications and alarms 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound 2 Tap Notifications 3 Select a ringtone and tap OK Setting up Vibration When Ringing This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound 2 Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the feature Audible System Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad make a screen selection lock your screen or tap the screen Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound Tap Dialing keypad tone to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Tap Haptic feedback to activate the a vibration when you press soft keys on certain screens A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is active Adapt sound The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call sounds 1 From the main Settings page tap My device tab gt Sound gt Adapt Sound Read the instruction
373. tap the Mode button to change the mode to one of the following Auto Use this mode to automatically adjust the exposure color and brightness settings This mode allows single image shots or burst shots Beauty face Use this to take photos with lightened faces for gentler images Best photo Use this to take multiple photos in a short time and then choose the best photos among them Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos When Gallery opens tap and hold thumbnails of photos to save and then tap Done Best face Use this to take multiple group shots at the same time and combine them to create the best possible image Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos When Gallery opens tap the yellow frame on each face and choose the best individual face for the subject After choosing a pose for each individual tap Done to merge the images into a single photo and tap Save Multimedia 151 152 Sound amp shot Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding background sounds for a few seconds The background sound is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo Drama Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object and then merge them together into one image Animated photo Use this to create a picture in which a few selected static objects move by animating objects detected by the device Rich tone
374. te Shared applications consist of those that have previously been downloaded from the Play Store 4 Select a sharing method Choose from Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Google Messaging S Memo and Wi Fi Direct 5 The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new information Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen lf this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 From the Home screen select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one 2 Tap Apps to reveal all your current available applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid 3 Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application 4 Touch and hold the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen 5 While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen 1 From the Home screen navigate to a screen with an empty area
375. tery The battery level displays in percentage 2 From the upper right tap Refresh to update the list or Tap an entry to view more detailed information Note Other applications may be running that affect battery use 330 SD Card amp Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB microSDXC memory card types can include capacities greater than 32GB To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and SD card headings Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files Doing so will result in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD card Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos and other applications You must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer 1 2 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Storage Tap Mount SD card Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corr
376. th the Warning and Maximum data limits Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time frames Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the current cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle Press and then select from the available on screen options e Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage For more information refer to Data Roaming on page 273 e Restrict background data prevents background data usage This can help prevent over usage of your data minutes e Auto sync data allows the device to automatically sync information and updates with your various services e Show Wi Fi usage activates an additional Wi Fi tab that shows you your Wi Fi data usage Changing Your Settings 271 e Mobile hotspots allows you to select available Wi Fi networks that can service as mobile hotspots Place a check mark on those entries you wish to use More Networks This tab displays additional wireless and network information m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Connections tab gt More networks Airplane Mode This mode allows you to use many of your device s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited Connections Important When your devi
377. the vibrate settings e TTY mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 300 Call rejection 1 From the main Call settings page tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following options All numbers to reject all calls e Auto reject numbers to reject all calls in your Reject list Tap Auto reject list Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list Tap Unknown to create a check mark and automatically reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list Set reject messages 1 From the main Call settings page tap Set up call rejection messages Tap to manually add a reject message or Tap one of the pre written messages to be displayed when you want the call to be rejected You can edit the message if desired Tap Save to save the reject message Answeringlending calls 1 From the main Call settings page tap Answering ending calls 2 Select any of the following options e The home key answers calls allows you to press to answer the phone e Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using voice e The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call Turn off screen during calls This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power m From the main Call settings page tap Turn off screen during calls to create a check mark and ena
378. their details screen 4 Tap Done 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send Exportlimport For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 108 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view service numbers listed in your Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 Press and then tap Settings Configure any of the following options e Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers e List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted First name or Last name e Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed First name ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve e Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers e Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your Contacts entries are sent individually or as a single file containing all available entries Tap Settings to select a share setting Send all namecards allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as multiple single files If all your entries are selected only a single file is sent Note Your destination device must support this feature or no entries will be received by the external device Send individual namecards allows
379. til you start the process or application again 4 Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application Storage Used This option allows you to view a list on the current tab of current applications as sorted by size 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager 2 Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications 3 Press and then tap Sort by size to change the current list to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy Reset App Preferences This feature provides you with the ability to reset all preferences for the following features Disabled apps Disabled app notifications Default applications for actions and Background data restrictions 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Applications manager 2 Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications 3 Press and then tap Reset app preferences gt Reset apps Changing Your Settings 329 Important As an example if you assigned your browser to always launch YouTube links and want that changed you must reset the default actions Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power The amount of time the battery was used also displays Battery usage displays in percentages per application a 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Bat
380. tings 302 Language and Input Settings 305 Motions and Gestures Settings 311 Smart Screen 2 ee ee 314 AI VIEW 0 ea E cece eee 315 Voice control 005 316 Add Account 005 316 Cloud o oide deder doer bogie nearantetscci de tow goth det 318 Backup and Reset 005 319 Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset 319 Location Services 0005 324 SECUN 5 sossrs ceteris a Nogen E 325 Application Manager 327 Battery Usage 222000 eee 330 SD Card amp Device Storage 330 Date and Time 0 2200 332 About Device 2 000 332 Software Update 0005 333 Section 11 Health and Safety WTOP ON cii n 335 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 335 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 00 000 cee eee 340 FCC Part 15 Information to User 342 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 342 Smart Practices While Driving 342 Battery Use and Safety 344 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 345 UL Certified Travel Charger 347 Display Touch Screen 347 GPS amp AGPS eee eee eee 348 Emergency Calls 349 Care and Maintenance 350 Responsible Listening 351 6
381. tion then tap OK Memory Usage See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running applications 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Applications manager 2 Tap DOWNLOADED RUNNING or ALL to display memory usage for that category of applications The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows used and free device memory The graph at the bottom of the Running tab shows used and free RAM Downloaded Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Applications manager 2 Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the downloaded applications on your device 3 To switch the order of the lists displayed in the Downloaded tabs press 1 and select Sort by size or Sort by name 4 Tap an application to view and update information about the application including memory usage default settings and permissions Running Services The Running services option allows you to view and control currently running services such as Backup Google Talk SNS messaging Swype and more 1 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Application manager 2 Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and running applications This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications 3 Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run un
382. tion provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 12 SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS Certain Samsung applications and services may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Many of them require Samsung Services 368 membership registration Samsung Account and your rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung Account terms and conditions and privacy policies There are non Samsung Account applications and services that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and privacy policies You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies 13 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE
383. tions America LLC All rights reserved No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung for software owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation in connection with your use of this device Software 364 This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one c
384. tle 3 ALign the on screen box atop the target text Once i down with a great book on your Android phone detected the device shows on screen information such as link and descriptions Note You must logged into your Google account prior to using Phone this feature This application provides the ability to make or answering Calls access the Contacts list which is used to store contact 1 From the Home screen tap FE Apps gt information yf Play Books m From the Home screen tap Ww Phone 2 If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device 3 Tap A to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks For more information refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 62 4 Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your device Applications and Development 223 Play Magazines With Google Play Magazines you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your device at any time or any place 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt E Play Magazines 2 Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so For more information refer to Signing into Your Google Account on page 20 3 At the Welcome display tap the shop icon to browse the full catalog 4 Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept 5 Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories
385. to adjust the screen brightness contrast This sensor decreases screen brightness in dim light e In a bright light condition outdoors the sensors cause the device to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing e In dim light conditions the device decreases the screen brightness to compensate 3 Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Add apps and widgets Create folder Set wallpaper Edit page Search and Settings options 4 Home key displays the Home screen when pressed Press and hold to display your recent apps Task manager and Remove all option Double press to activate S Voice Understanding Your Device 29 10 30 Microphones are used during phone calls and allow other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them There are two microphones on the device Bottom microphone used during handset mode Top microphone used while an active call is in the speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation 2 microphone solution USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB data cable Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as the connection status received signal strength phone battery level and time Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen a
386. tric shock to you or damage to the mobile device 350 Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft Cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound h
387. ts allows you to add various effects to your photo Portrait allows you to apply various face correction effects such as Red eye fix Airbrush face Face brightness Out of focus Beauty face Funny face or Spot healing Sticker allows you to place various pre created on screen stickers atop your current image Drawing allows you to add draw directly on your current picture by using either a brush pen or eraser Frame places a pre created border style atop your current image 6 Press to access the following options 168 e Save as allows you to rename your current image and save it to your gallery e Select image allows you to select a new image for editing e Take picture allows you to activate the camera and take a new image for editing e Share via allows you to share your saved photo via Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Group Play Messaging Picasa S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Set as assigns the currently saved image as either a Contact photo Home and lock screens Home screen or Lock screen The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery access Files and remove some of the media files from the folders and then open the Gallery
388. ts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone SIM Google or Corporate Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a Device SIM Samsung account Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync contact Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone Device contacts are stored locally on the device Contacts 95 Note If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost SIM contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing Samsung account e Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Add new account lets you create a new account type Choose from Samsung account Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 96 Note When storing an entry into your micro
389. ttings gt My device tab gt Display Configure the following screen display settings Wallpaper allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen Lock screen or both e Notification Panel allows you to set the brightness of your notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that you want to display at the top of the notification panel page 38 Multi window tap this option to enable disable the automatic Multi window feature Screen mode allows you to select from several different color modes e Brightness adjusts the on screen brightness level For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 288 e Auto rotate screen when enabled the phone automatically switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the phone displays in portrait mode only e Screen timeout adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Selections are 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes and 10 minutes e Daydream allows you to control what your screen does when your device is docked or sleeping Tap the adjacent OFF ON icon to turn it on Follow the on screen instructions e Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font Choco cooky Cool jazz Rosemary Samsung Sans or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts e Font size allows you to select which
390. ttings page tap Connections tab 2 Verify the NFC feature is active 3 4 Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on Complete the transfer process between the two NFC enabled devices by placing them back to back This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures between users with compatible S Beam devices For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 163 Nearby devices This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Connect to a Wi Fi network For more information refer to Connecting to a Wi Fi Network on page 256 From the main Settings page tap Connections tab gt Nearby devices Tap the File sharing field to turn File sharing on A green check mark indicates the feature is active Once active do Nearby devices appears at the top of the screen At the Nearby devices prompt tap OK Tap Shared contents then check the media you would like to share Tap OK Tap Allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to allow Tap Not allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to not allow Tap Download to then select the destination of any downloaded shared content Choose from USB storage Device or SD card Changing Your Settings 27
391. ttp www hpa org uk Topics Radiation US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation EmittingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm 340 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public an
392. tures The following list outlines a few of the features included in your device Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboard Brilliant 4 99 HD Super AMOLED screen 1920 x 1080 1 9 gigahertz quad core processor Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology by using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus HSPA Android 4 2 2 Jelly Bean Platform Smart Switch compliant For more information see www samsungsmartswitch com Support for Air View and Air Gestures Wi Fi Capability WatchON Rich TV experience with Infrared IR remote Over 700 000 Apps available to download from the Google Play Store and Samsung Apps Access Movies TV Shows Music Games and Books with Samsung Hub Samsung Link to share your media content across connected devices Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external Web storage service e Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub 13 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital zoom e 2 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat e Share Shot picture sharing functionality e S Beam file transfer technology e Share Shot camera sharing capable via multi connect Wi Fi Direct connection e Bluetooth enabled NFC compatible e Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail YouTube Google Maps Google Voice Search Understanding Your Device 27 Multiple Messaging Options
393. twork or internet provider Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi Fi connection the Software will access through your mobile 366 network which may result in additional charges depending on your payment plan In addition your enjoyment of some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and performance of your device hardware or data access 7 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms 8 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including all the applicable export restriction laws and regulations 9 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon
394. ually by toggling the status of the Notification panel function For more information refer to Accessing Additional Screen Functions on page 39 Displays your current signal strength The greater the number of bars the stronger the signal Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active You Ww cannot send or receive any calls or access online information KE a2eeg8680 Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displays when there is a system error or alert Displays to indicate a security warning You are prompted to set a screen lock password Displays when a call is in progress Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when a call is on hold Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth headset Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when you have missed an incoming call o gt h O Daa Displays when you device is set to automatically reject all incoming calls The All numbers option is enabled from within Call settings gt Call rejection gt Auto reject mode menu Displays when the speakerphone is on Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when the microphone is muted Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized For more information referto
395. ubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message e Background style allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages e Use the volume key allows you to change the text size by using the up or down volume keys Push message settings e Push messages allows you to receive push messages from the network e Service loading allows you to set the type of service loading Notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings e Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your status bar e Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications e Vibrate allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts e Message alert repetition allows you to set the interval for new message alerts Choose from Once Every 2 minutes or Every 10 minutes Preview message when enabled allows you to view a brief preview of new message text on the Status bar Messages 127 Emergency message settings e Emergency alerts allows you to configure emergency alert settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receive Choose from Imminent extreme alert Imminent severe alert and AMBER alerts Note The Presidential alert can not be disabled e Emergency notification preview allows you to play a sample emergency alert tone Tap Stop to cancel the playback Signature settings e Add signature when enabled thi
396. uch and hold an entry to access the entry specific context menu 3 Tap Copy to dialing screen 4 Edit the number usin on screen keypad or delete digits by pressing KJ to erase the numbers 5 Tap ENA once the number has been changed Erasing the Call logs List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Logs list To clear a single entry from the list 1 From the Home screen tap W gt Logs tab 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Delete gt Delete To clear all entries from the list 1 From the Home screen tap i gt Logs tab 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Tap Select all 4 Tap Delete gt Delete to continue with the erasure or Tap Cancel to stop the current process Call Functions and Contacts List 83 Call Duration 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap is gt Logs tab Press and then tap Call duration The following times are displayed for Voice and Data e Last call shows the length of time for the last call e Dialed calls shows the total length of time for all calls made e Received calls shows the total length of time for all calls received e All calls shows the total length of time for all calls made and received You may reset these times to zero by pressing then tapping Reset a Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed calls are display
397. unts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account information Next time you synchronize your device with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses etc automatically update in your contacts list Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name 3 Press and then tap Join contact 4 Note The information is still maintained in both entries but From the Home screen tap a Tap a contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen or account information Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts Important It is the first contact image that is displayed for both and the first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with Julie second entry Julie seems to disappear and only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry showing the Amy image to view both 5 Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information you linked The conta
398. uption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 2 3 From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Storage Tap Unmount SD card gt OK After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device 1 2 Ensure the SD card is mounted From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Storage gt Mount SD card Tap Format SD card gt Format SD card gt Delete all to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Changing Your Settings 331 Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed ESS 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More tab gt Date and time 2 Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set the date and time Important Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 4 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set 5 Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically 6 Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 7 Tap Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the device automatically uses a 12 hour format 8 Tap Selec
399. ur Settings 321 9 When you get a new phone update your software or reset your device sign in to your Samsung account and the backed up bookmarks will be displayed on your Bookmarks page under the Samsung account heading Backing Up Settings to Google You can use your Google account to back up apps Wi Fi Backing Up Internet Bookmarks to your Samsung Account You can back up your Internet bookmarks by using your Samsung account Only bookmarks you have added non default can be backed up 1 From the main Settings page tap Accounts tab 2 Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add passwords and other data account and select Samsung account 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt 3 Sign in to your Samsung account or tap Create new Gmail account if you don t have one yet 2 Tap Existing if you have a Google account Follow the on screen instructions The Inbox loads conversations and email 4 From the Home screen tap Apps gt or Internet Tap New if you do not have a Google account 5 From the webpage tap Bookmarks 3 Confirm that immediately after signing in to your 6 Press and then tap Move to folder Google account the Backup and restore screen is 7 Place a checkmark on those Bookmarks you want to displayed back up then tap Done 4 From within the Backup and restore screen tap the 8 Select a location or folder The Bookmarks that you checkbox next to Keep this phone backed up w
400. urces or blocked numbers If an incoming message is designated in coming from an unknown sender it is automatically assigned as spam and is now located in your Spam folder Accessing Your Spam Folder Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Spam messages Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap amessage to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap P 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates E 3 Tap Create text template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save Using Email Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To sen
401. urrent download by opening the Notifications panel The content download icon a appears in the notification area of the status bar 226 7 On the main Play Store screen press and then tap My Apps tap an installed application in the list and then tap Open Tip The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap FE Apps 2 Tap the newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Play Store applications m From the main Settings page tap More tab gt Security gt Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active Note If Unknown sources is disabled those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for
402. utomatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from e Off disables the auto rejection feature e All numbers enables the features for all known and unknown numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list e Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list Blacklist Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen page 104 3 Press El and then tap Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list 1 3 From the main Call settings page tap Call rejection gt Auto reject list Tap Create and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list Tap Save to complete the assignment International Calls 1 From the Home screen tap W and then touch and hold O until the device shows on screen Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number I
403. vailable list For example DirectTV e If your brand does not appear in the list tap Other Satellite Box Brands and follow the on screen instructions Important You must configure your set top box for IR communication with your device If you do not select More Info below and follow the on screen instructions you may not be able to properly use the application 11 When prompted to Enable IR tap More Info to learn how to configure your set top box to receive and respond to IR controls 12 Only after completing the IR setup process and programming your box press 5 Back Note This IR programming of your set top box is a one time process and once successful should not need to be repeated 13 If prompted to personalize your experience follow the on screen instructions Using WatchON To change channels 1 Sign into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt watchon 3 From the top of the main screen tap B Remote Control This launches an on screen set of remote control tabs Choose from one of the following e Easy remote provides the most common used control features Scroll down to view additional functions Multimedia 177 5 e Set top box displays customized control specific to your configured set top box Ex satellite dish remote control functions e TV provides access to control functions specific to your TV From the top of the main screen tap Select Room to choo
404. vate 46 312 Air Browse 312 Air Call Accept 312 Air Jump 312 Air Move 312 Answering a Call 66 On 46 312 Quick Glance 46 312 Airplane Mode On 272 Alarm Deleting an Existing Alarm 205 Setting 203 Turning Off 205 Alerts Presidential 128 Alerts on Call 293 Allow Diagnostics 18 324 AllShare Cast Hub 36 Activation on Device 197 Connecting 197 Set Up Hardware 197 AllShare Play see Samsung Link 193 234 AllShareCast Hub 234 AMBER Alerts 128 Disable 129 Android Beam 278 Answering Home Key 293 295 Answering a Call 65 66 Application cache and data Clearing 227 Application Menus Navigating through 53 Applications 43 Calculator 199 Camera 202 Email 209 Google Mail 210 Google Maps 215 Hide 43 Internet 213 messaging 218 Sharing with Others 56 Show Hidden 43 Shutting Down 25 Storage Used 329 Using the Camcorder 158 Using the Camera 150 Video 238 Voice Recorder 238 YouTube 240 Applications and Development 199 Apps Adding 42 Reset Preferences 329 Apps Screen Customizing 43 Area Code Auto Assign 296 Audio Output Mode 302 Auto Redial 296 Auto Reject Configuration 67 Auto Reject List 292 Auto Reject Mode 292 Automatic Answering 293 Automatic Restore 319 B Back up My Account 319 My Data 319 Backup and Restore 319 Battery Charging 13 Display Percentage 15 287 Extending Life 15 Installing 12 Low Battery Indicator 15 Removal 12 Wall Charger 13 Battery Cover Removal 8 Replace 9
405. vices area 4 Tap an available category tab Pictures Music Movies Files or Info and select a file e Afile with N in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services servers Multimedia 195 5 Tap an available on screen file image or video to place a green check mark alongside it 6 Tap Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming 7 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source 8 Confirm Samsung Link Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source 196 AllShare Cast Hub This hardware allows you to enjoy what s currently on your device directly on your TV Note There is no need to be connected to a Wi Fi network or to be logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI Fi Direct connection between the device and the hub For more information about this device go to http www samsung com us mobile cell phones accessories EAD T1I0JDEGSTA http www samsung com us mobile cell phones accessories EAD TIOJDEGSTA Connecting AllShare Cast Hub To connect your AllShare Cast
406. windows and locate your target window 3 Tap B next to the listing to delete the window Going Incognito The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing Pages viewed in this incognito window won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device Note Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode To add a new incognito window 1 From your browser window press 1 and select Incognito mode 2 At the information prompt tap OK 3 Anew browser window displays To exit from the incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window The incognito icon appears in the upper left of the new browser window while you are in this mode 3 Tap B next to the incognito listing to delete this window Using Bookmarks While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 From the webpage tap Bookmarks The Bookmarks page displays 2 Press to display the following options e List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the
407. xt Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode m From the Home screen tap E Apps gt S Voice For more information refer to Using S Voice on page 80 Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications that are directly compatible with your device This includes games news reference social networking navigation and more Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 1 Confirm you are currently signed into your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Samsung Apps 3 If prompted read the Disclaimer Terms and conditions and Privacy policy and tap Accept 4 Follow the on screen instructions Samsung Hub Samsung Hub is Samsung s integrated store for media content that offers a comprehensive and consistent media service experience You can browse and purchase all media content within a single store front Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 1 From the Home screen tap Epi Apps gt 3 Samsung Hub For more information refer to Samsung Hub on page 172 2 If a Wi Fi connection is not detected tap Connect to use your current
408. yer and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device Creating a Playlist 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Press and then tap Create playlist 3 Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap OK 190 Adding Music to a Playlist 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Tap the playlist name in which to add music 3 Tap Add music This option is available within user created playlists Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist 4 Tap a music file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done Removing Music from a Playlist 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Tap the playlist name in which to delete music 3 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Remove Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can also share delete or rename the playlist Note Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default playlists can not be renamed 1 From within the Music application tap the Playlists tab 2 Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Edit title 4 Enter anew name for this playlist and tap OK Transferring Mu
409. you to set your default to send individual contacts one at a time Even if you select all your entries each is sent individually Contacts 113 Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Caller Group 1 114 From the Home screen tap ks gt Groups tab Press and then tap Create Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 85 Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default ringtone Ringtones select from available ringtones or Add to navigate your device and select an existing audio file Tap Message alert and select a message alert ringtone to be associated with this group Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern either from an available list or Create your own This pattern is then associated with this group Tap Add member to add Contacts to the new group 9 From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Then tap Done or Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all current entries Then tap Done Tap Save to store the newly created group Note Some externally maintained group types such as Google can only b

Samsung S4 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents